JP2023068835A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes section setting means for setting a non-advantageous section on the basis of a predetermined value that changes as a game progresses in an advantageous section having reached a limiter value, and game state setting means which can set a first game state advantageous to a player in the advantageous section and terminates the first game state on the basis of the loss of a continuation right of the first game state. The section setting means sets the non-advantageous section regardless of whether the continuation right is present or not and whether the limiter value has been reached, when a first condition is satisfied in the first game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by reel game machines (slot machines) and pinball game machines (pachinko machines).

Conventionally, there is a game machine that shifts to a state advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-110690 A

The gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1 can improve the interest of the game by shifting to various game states, but there is room for improvement in its configuration.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the amusement machine of the present invention includes:
section setting means for setting an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section;
game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
A game machine comprising
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section based on the fact that a predetermined value that changes as the game progresses reaches a limiter value in the advantageous section,
The game state setting means is means for terminating the first game state based on the loss of the right to continue the first game state,
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section regardless of the presence or absence of the continuation right and whether or not the limiter value has been reached when the first condition is established in the first gaming state. ,
It is characterized by

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which improves the interest of a game can be provided.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing internal winning combinations and winning probabilities; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of some internal winning combinations; 2 is a transition diagram of a lottery state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (c) is 4 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (c) is 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of transition from a normal AT state to a higher AT state via a bonus state B and then to a higher AT state; FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the state of the gaming machine along the timing chart of FIG. 14; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation setting by a user. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is executed; 18(a) to (g) are diagrams showing states at respective timings (a) to (g) shown in FIG. 17; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is not executed; 20(a) to (g) are diagrams showing states at respective timings (a) to (g) shown in FIG. 19; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is executed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed; 21. (a) to (h) are diagrams showing states at respective timings (a) to (h) shown in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the number of bets has been set but is insufficient to start a game, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart in which the number of bets has been set, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the settlement button 134 is operated while "elapsed" is being clocked. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example employing a configuration in which the timing of automatic initialization is changed according to the set volume; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart and its state when a demonstration screen is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when no demo screen is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when shifting from AT state to normal state A; FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the timing chart of FIG. 27; 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing pay lines and performance lines of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 34, FIG. 35, and FIG. 36 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 36, together with FIGS. 33, 35 and 36, shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 33, 34 and 36, together with FIG. 33, FIG. 34, and FIG. 36, are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 33, 34 and 35, together with FIG. 33, FIG. 34, and FIG. 35, are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types and names of internal winning combinations of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart which shows a flow. It is an example of a time chart when the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention executes an aiming effect. FIG. 43(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the reel display mode and the effect mode of the effect image display device in the case of FIG. 43(a). FIG. 43B is a diagram showing the transition of the reel display mode and the effect mode of the effect image display device in the case of FIG. 43(b). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of reels and an effect mode of the effect image display device when the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention internally wins the BB; FIG. 10 is a table showing an example of the occurrence frequency of notification effects for each internal winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing some types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to some of the winning combinations of the slot machine according to Modification 1 of one embodiment of the present invention; (b) is a diagram showing part of the combination structure of the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine according to Modification 1 of one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing some types of winning combinations (including working combinations) of a slot machine according to Modification 2 of an embodiment of the present invention, and symbol combinations corresponding to some of the winning combinations; , (b) is a diagram showing some of the types of winning combinations (including working combinations) of the slot machine according to Modification 2 of the embodiment of the present invention, and symbol combinations corresponding to some of the winning combinations; be. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and a diagram showing the operation of the liquid crystal display device. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an array of symbols provided on reels of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 56, FIG. 57, and FIG. 58 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 58, together with FIGS. 55, 57 and 58, shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55, FIG. 56, and FIG. 58 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55, FIG. 56, and FIG. 57 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations) and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 60, together with FIG. 60, is a diagram showing types and names of internal winning combinations of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 59, together with FIG. 59, is a diagram showing types and names of internal winning combinations of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of first sub-controller main processing, first sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-controller timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. Second sub-controller main processing, second sub-controller command reception interrupt processing, second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, and second sub-controller image control processing of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention It is a flow chart which shows a flow. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of effect images displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the CZ state and AT state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation navigation when the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention is in an AT state and internally won a push order symbol blue 7 replay; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation navigation when the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention is in an AT state and internally won a push order symbol blue 7 replay; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation navigation when the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention is in an AT state and internally won a push order symbol blue 7 replay; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation navigation when the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention is in an AT state and internally won a push order symbol blue 7 replay; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a band display effect of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the strip display effect of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the strip display effect of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the counting of the winning number display in the AT state of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the effect modes of the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification mode of the operation prompting effect and the operation response effect of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention; 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing various members arranged inside the main body 101 in an exploded manner; FIG. It shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 2 is a rear view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the rear side. FIG. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an example of the arrangement of the voltage display seal 294, showing various dimensions. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 and some members of the main body 101 are removed. FIG. (a) is a front view of a voltage display sticker 294; (b) to (d) are front views of voltage display stickers according to modifications. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 1) of the voltage display sticker 294, showing various dimensions. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 2) of the voltage display seal 294, showing various dimensions. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 3) of the voltage display seal 294, and shows various dimensions. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 4) of the voltage display seal 294, showing various dimensions. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 5) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 6) of the voltage display seal 294, and shows various dimensions. FIG. 20 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modified example 7) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions. FIG. 11 is a side view of a housing showing an arrangement example (modified example 8) of a voltage display seal 294, and showing various dimensions. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of slot machines 100 stored in a warehouse or the like before being installed in an island facility;

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are started to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. At the same time, based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels receives a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation to individually rotate. If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is paid out. This is a game machine that advances a series of games that end without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Prepare. Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at equal intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 2, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the drawing) are displayed on the left reel upper row symbols and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the drawing). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed on the upper stage. The symbol is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 lower stage (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 shown in the figure) are called the right reel bottom row symbols, respectively. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the reel installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, is displayed. Only one middle prize line L1 composed of reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 2 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, none of the winning lines are activated. validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, BB1, BB2, and RB) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that a BB1 internal lottery, BB2 internal lottery, or RB internal lottery, which will be described later, is won. It is a lamp that informs the player that the lottery has been won or that the lottery is in BB1 operation, BB2 operation, or RB operation. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Note that the bet buttons 130 to 132 correspond to an example of the bet amount operating means.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during BB1 operation) in numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged above the front door 102. Above the production device 160, the sound of a speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) provided inside the slot machine 100 is output to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that the effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of display means and effect means.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 . Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data volume becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. and the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited. Note that the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of bet number setting means, stop control means, game state setting means, and interval setting means. Also, the first sub-controller 400 corresponds to an example of effect setting means.

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms. Note that the RAM 308 stores credit values and corresponds to an example of game value storage means.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as the medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the payout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically accumulated medals are paid out (the value stored in the RAM 308 is cleared and the same number of medals are discharged). The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112, and the light shield provided on the reel frame. It becomes L level every time a piece passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling lighting patterns of the backlight, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 1 on the left reel 110 has a "replay symbol", the frame numbered 0 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell symbol", and the frame numbered 3 on the right reel 112 has a "BB1 symbol". , are placed respectively.

The slot machine 100 in this embodiment stops the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed, in order to improve the amusement of the game. It is configured.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include BB1, BB2, RB, cherry, watermelon, common bell, middle bell, single combination A to F, and replays (common replays, promotion replays 1 to 4). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted. Note that "winning" in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve payout of medals) is displayed on an activated line.

BB1, BB2, and RB are combinations (operating combinations) that shift to states (BB1 operating state, BB2 operating state, and RB operating state, respectively) in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player by winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 200 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state, 200 medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state, and 48 medals are awarded in the RB operating state. Note that BB1, BB2, and RB do not pay out medals due to winning the role itself. In the following description, BB1, BB2, and RB may be collectively referred to as bonuses.

When BB1, BB2 and RB are internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control section 300). When the flag corresponding to BB1 is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the BB1 internal winning state, and when the flag corresponding to BB2 is set to ON, changes the game state. When the BB2 internal winning state is entered and the flag corresponding to RB is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the RB internal winning state. These flags are maintained in the on state until the corresponding working combination is won, and in the next and subsequent games, it becomes easy to win these working combinations. That is, even if BB1, BB2, and RB are not won in the game in which BB1, BB2, and RB are internally won, the same state as the state in which BB1, BB2, and RB are internally won is entered in the next and subsequent games, and the corresponding symbol combinations are complete. Makes it easier to win. In the BB1 internal winning state, the BB2 internal winning state, and the RB internal winning state, if a hand other than BB1, BB2 and RB is internally won, the symbols constituting the other hand are given priority. Stop control of the reels is executed so that they are aligned.

A replay is a prize-winning combination (operating combination) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. That is, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of previously inserted coins. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. It should be noted that, when the promotion replay wins, the symbol combination of the common replay stops in the lower row. Then, when a promotion replay is won in RT1, which will be described later, the process proceeds to RT2, which will be described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 5). Note that the above replay may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. The number of inserted medals may be reset in a prepared medal insertion number storage area), or the medals inserted in a replay winning game can be carried over to the next game as they are and used. good too.

Cherry, watermelon, common bell, middle bell, and single-card combinations A to F are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations and payout numbers are as shown in FIG.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing internal winning combinations and winning probabilities. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the details of some internal winning combinations.

FIG. 6 shows a table of internally winning combinations obtained by combining the combinations described in FIG. 5 and a plurality of types of winning probabilities for each of them. These tables correspond to lottery states, which will be described later, and include RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1 internal winning, BB1 activation, BB2 internal winning, BB2 activation, RB internal winning, and RB activation. Of these, RT0 and RT1 have common winning probabilities, and FIG. 6 shows the values of these winning probabilities. In the same figure, the winning probability of RT0 and RT1 is used as a reference (hereinafter referred to as reference winning probability), and the tables other than RT0 and RT1 are indicated by the presence or absence of variation from this reference winning probability. For example, in RT2, BB1 internal winning, BB2 internal winning, and RB internal winning, the winning probability of replays (common replay, promotion replay) is shown to be higher than the reference winning probability. Further, for example, in the BB1 operation, the BB2 operation, and the RB operation, it is shown that the winning probability of the common bell increases with respect to the reference winning probability.

The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to the internal winning combination shown in FIG. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game. In the following description of this operation, it may be referred to as internal winning of a role.

The replay in FIG. 6 includes NRP and RPGr in FIG. The NRP is internally elected independently in the common replay, and when this NRP is internally elected, the common replay symbol combination is stopped regardless of the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. In RPGr, common replays and promotion replays are duplicated and internally won, and when internally won in RPGr, the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is the correct operation order (in this example, middle, right, left). If any of the symbol combinations for the promotion replay is stopped, and if it is not the correct operation order, the symbol combination for the common replay is stopped.

BEGr1 to 6 are internally won by overlapping the middle bell and one hand, and when internally won in BEGr1 to 6, stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 corresponds to the correct operation order. If it is (see FIG. 7), the middle bell pattern combination is stopped (eight coins are paid out), and if it is not in the correct operation order, either one of the winning combinations or the losing pattern combination is stopped (one or zero). payout).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, set values are set for different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting values 1 to 6 are prepared. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the internal winning combinations of BEGr1 to 6 are equal, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If you do not win the internal winning combination, you will lose, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the combination will not be displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, there is a case where the fact that the player did not win any of the internal winning roles is expressed as "won a wrong win".

<Types of lottery status>
Next, the types of lottery states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and changes in the lottery states will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram of the lottery state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is configured to switch states in which the player's advantage is different by switching a plurality of lottery tables as shown in FIG. Below, the state corresponding to this lottery table is called a lottery state. As shown in FIG. 8, this lottery state includes RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1 internal winning, BB1 operation, BB2 internal winning, BB2 operation, RB internal winning, and RB operation. The lottery state is controlled by the main control unit 300 .

RT0 has the lowest replay internal winning probability and is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Note that this is also the initial state in this embodiment.

RT1 has the lowest internal winning probability of replay and is the most disadvantageous state for the player.

RT2 is more advantageous to the player than RT0 and RT1 because the replay internal winning probability is higher than RT0 and RT1.

BB1 internal winning, BB2 internal winning, and RB internal winning are states in which internal winning flags corresponding to BB1, BB2, and RB are set to ON, respectively. In these lottery states, it is easy to shift to BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation. However, as described above, when a winning combination other than BB1, BB2, and RB is internally won, reel stop control is executed so that the symbols constituting the other combination are aligned preferentially. Therefore, it is impossible to shift to BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation.

BB1 actuation, BB2 actuation, and RB actuation are advantageous states in which medals can be obtained easily because the internal winning probability of common bells is higher than in other lottery states.

FIG. 8 shows the lottery states described above, and the symbols (A) to (K) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the lottery states. When each transition condition is met, the lottery state transitions in the direction of the arrow. It should be noted that the code (A) "Middle bell drop" means that when the BEGr 1 to 6 (see FIGS. 6 and 7) are internally won, the middle bell is won because the stop operation was not in the correct operation order. It means that there was not.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and changes in the game states will be described. FIG. 9 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. (Upper AT preparation state A, higher AT preparation state B), can be switched. Each game state will be described below.

The normal state A is set in the first game after changing the settings or clearing the RAM. From this normal state A, if a payout combination (a combination other than BB1, BB2, RB, and replay) is internally won and a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won, the state shifts to normal state B (transition condition (A) in FIG. 9). ). The winning probability of the lottery for transition to this advantageous interval is 1/1.1, and the state is configured to immediately transition to the normal state B. Also, when BB1, BB2, or RB is won, the game shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 9).

The normal state B is a game state in which the player mainly stays. In this normal state B, when the set scheduled number of games is completed, the state shifts to the CZ state (transition condition (B) in FIG. 9). Also, by winning the AT direct hit lottery, the state shifts to the normal AT state (transition condition (D) in FIG. 9). Also, when BB1, BB2, or RB is won, the game shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 9).

In the CZ state, an effect that expects a shift to the normal AT state is executed. In this CZ state, if the AT lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal AT state (transition condition (E) in FIG. 9), and if not, the state shifts to normal state B (transition condition (C) in FIG. 9). In addition, when shifting to the normal AT state, the number of remaining AT games is set. Also, when BB1, BB2, or RB is won, the game shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 9). Incidentally, when the player wins BB1, BB2, or RB, the number of AT remaining games is set (AT state transition confirmation), but it may not be set.

In the normal AT state, when RPGr and BEGr1-6 are internally won, the correct operation order is announced. By following this notification, the player wins the promotion replay and the lottery state shifts to RT2. In RT2, the internal winning probability of the replay increases, so the decrease in medals can be suppressed. In addition, since it becomes easier to win the middle bell, the player can obtain more profits. This normal AT state shifts to the normal state A when the set number of remaining AT games becomes 0 (transition condition (F) in FIG. 9). Note that the number of remaining AT games may be increased by lottery. Also, when BB1, BB2 and RB are won, the state shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 9). In addition, when the conditions for shifting to a higher AT state are met (for example, a lottery for each game, a lottery based on an internal winning combination, or an internal winning for a specific combination), the state is shifted to a higher AT state (Fig. 9 transition condition (J)). Regarding the conditions for transitioning to a higher AT state, for example, when there is a predetermined number or more of rights to continue the normal AT state such as the number of remaining AT games, or when the number of games or the number of acquired sheets is close to the limit value (or has been determined) ), any condition can be adopted as appropriate.

In the bonus state A, the lottery state is one of BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation, and when the prescribed number of coins for these states is paid out, the state shifts to either the normal state B or the normal AT state. do. Specifically, if the number of AT remaining games is 0 (if there is no AT right), the state shifts to normal state B (transition condition (H) in FIG. 9), and if the number of AT remaining games is not 0 (AT right If there is, it shifts to the normal AT state (transition condition (I) in FIG. 9). It should be noted that the transition destination after the bonus state A ends may be not the normal state B, but any state in the non-advantageous section. The advantage may be increased based on internal winning (or winning) of some role in (or immediately preceding internal winning state).

In the higher AT state, the correct operation order is reported in the same manner as in the normal AT state, and the player can obtain more profit. The number of remaining sets is set for the transition to the upper AT state. When the AT remaining game number is 0, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining set number, and 20 is added to the AT remaining game number (1 set corresponds to 20 AT remaining game number). In other words, the number of remaining AT games and the number of remaining sets are managed for the continuation of the higher AT state. Also, in the higher AT state, the number of remaining sets may be added by lottery. In addition, when comparing the remaining AT games, the higher AT state has more AT remaining games than the normal AT state (or the addition is larger), and is more advantageous than the normal AT state. It's becoming If a player wins BB1, BB2, or RB in this high-level AT state, it shifts to high-level AT preparation state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 9). It should be noted that the number of remaining AT games is cleared when the higher AT state is shifted to the higher AT preparation state A. FIG.

The upper AT preparation state A is also a state in which the lottery state is one of BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation. When the prescribed number of coins for these states is paid out, the state shifts to normal state A (transition condition (K) in FIG. 9). In addition, before the specified number of payouts is made, if a payout combination (BB1, BB2, RB, and a combination other than replay) is internally won and the transition lottery is won, the system shifts to the higher AT preparation state B (transition conditions in FIG. 9). (A)). The winning probability of this transition lottery is 1/1.1, and is configured to immediately transition to the upper AT preparation state B.

The upper AT preparation state B is a state in which the lottery state (BB1 operation, BB2 operation, RB operation) in the upper AT preparation state A continues. When the prescribed number of coins for these states is paid out, the state shifts to a higher AT state (transition condition (K) in FIG. 9). It should be noted that the number of remaining AT games is newly set when shifting to a higher AT state.

Each game state described above belongs to a non-advantageous section (normal state A, higher AT preparation state A) and belongs to an advantageous section (normal state B, CZ state, bonus state A, normal AT state, higher AT state, upper AT ready state B). In the advantageous section, an upper limit (limiter) is set for each of the number of staying games and the number of payouts so that the gambling nature does not become too high. It is configured to return (transition condition (L) in FIG. 9).

FIG. 9 shows the game states described above, and the symbols (A) to (L) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between game states. When each transition condition is satisfied, the game state transitions in the direction of the arrow. It should be noted that the transition conditions described above are only examples, and other conditions may be adopted without being limited to these conditions. For example, when the transition to the AT state is confirmed, when winning BB1, BB2, RB, or when each bonus is consumed, a lottery according to the winning combination (or not according to the winning combination) It may be when you are elected.

<Overview of processing>
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, initial setting processing of the main control unit is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is initialized. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (three) of medals has been used. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, the internal lottery table of the internal winning combination stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current lottery state, and the internal lottery (lottery of the combination) is performed using this table and the random number obtained from the random number generating circuit 316. , processing for determining an internal winning combination, AT lottery, adding AT remaining game number, etc. (various lottery processing).

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

In step S109, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this processing, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (first 1st to 3rd stop commands) to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S 115 , if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is given (paid out), and the given number is displayed using the payout number display 127 .

In step S117, state update processing is executed. Specifically, processes such as the transition of the lottery state and the game state are executed.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (if it is ON, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever Receipt command, internal winning command, effect command accompanying effect lottery processing, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquisition point command, setting change command, power recovery command ) and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 308. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Processing of first sub-controller 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 12(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initialization is performed when the power is turned on. In this processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect data is expanded, the processing of setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command And based on the information contained in the command, it performs processing such as setting effect data and executing control processing. Note that the effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the effect contents are changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from the device data set in the effect execution areas corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277 and outputting the acquired control data to the sound source IC 418, sound effects are executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to various lamps 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the driving circuit 422, the effect by the lamp is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, the control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the driving circuit 424, thereby executing the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-controller 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 12A and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

<Processing of second sub-controller 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 13(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an instruction for image control in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 13A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 obtains information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, and so on). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431. wait for is entered.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Explanation of operation example≫
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example.

[Example of moving from normal AT state to higher AT state, bonus state B, and then to higher AT state]
14 and 15, an example of transition from the normal AT state to the higher AT state through the bonus state B to the higher AT state will be described below. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing an example of transition from the normal AT state to the upper AT state via the bonus state B and then to the upper AT state. Also, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the state of the gaming machine according to the timing chart of FIG.

In this example, the game state is the normal AT state, and the operation from the state in which the production during the normal AT accompanying this is being executed will be described. In the effect during the normal AT, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the number of winnings after the normal AT state is displayed on the upper right (see FIG. 15(a)). Also, regarding the lottery status, it is assumed that RT2 is the result of following the correct operation order (FIG. 7) notified when the RPGr and BEGr1-6 are internally won.

Here, it is assumed that the batting order bell (here, BEGr4 in FIG. 7) is internally won at the timing of FIG. 14(a). FIG. 15(a) shows how the correct operation order (here, center, right, left) is reported to the batting order bell. Furthermore, it is assumed that the batting order bell (here, BEGr4 in FIG. 7) is internally won at the timing of FIG. 14(b) after FIG. 14(a). FIG. 15(b) shows how the correct operation order (here, center, right, left) is reported to the batting order bell. It should be noted that FIG. 15(b) shows that the number of remaining AT games is smaller than that of FIG. 15(a), and the number of acquired coins is larger.

Subsequently, it is assumed that a transition to the upper AT state is performed at the timing shown in FIG. In the performance during the high-ranking AT, the number of remaining AT games and the number of sets (the number of subtractions of the number of sets) are displayed on the upper left of the screen. In addition, the number of cards obtained after the normal AT state is continuously displayed on the upper right (see FIG. 15(c)). Also, regarding the lottery state, it is assumed that RT2 continues as a result of following the correct operation sequence (FIG. 7) as in the normal AT state.

Here, it is assumed that the batting order bell (here, BEGr6 in FIG. 7) is internally won at the timing of FIG. 14(c). FIG. 15(c) shows how the correct operation order (here, right, middle, left) is reported to the batting order bell.

Next, it is assumed that BB1 is internally won at the timing of FIG. 14(d) (BB1 is not won in the game). At this stage, the gaming state remains in the higher AT state, but the lottery state shifts to BB1 internal winning. Furthermore, in addition to the performance during the high-ranking AT, the performance of announcing the internal winning of BB1 is executed. FIG. 15(d) shows that the symbol combination of BB1 is displayed as the notification effect.

Assume that BB1 is won at the timing shown in FIG. 14(e). FIG. 15(e) shows the state at the timing of winning BB1 in FIG. 14(e). In this case, the state changes from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, the game state shifts to the upper AT preparation state A of the bonus state B from the next game, and the lottery state shifts to the BB1 operation. Also, the effect during the high rank AT is switched to the effect during the bonus (see FIG. 15(f)). In the effect during the bonus, the number obtained in the game is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the number obtained after the normal AT state is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen.

Furthermore, it is assumed that the common bell is internally won at the timing of FIG. 14(f), and that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section when the common bell is internally won is won. FIG. 15(f) shows the situation at the timing when the common bell of FIG. 14(f) is won. In this case, the state changes from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, and from the next game, the game state shifts to the upper AT preparation state B of the bonus state B, but the lottery state remains BB1 operation. Also, the effect during the bonus (see FIG. 15(f)) is continuously executed.

After that, it is assumed that the specified number of coins is paid out for the BB1 operation. FIG. 15(g) shows the state at the end of the upper AT preparation state B (FIG. 14(g)). In this case, from the next game, the higher AT preparation state B shifts to the higher AT state, and the lottery state shifts to RT0. Here, the production in the upper AT is executed, but the number of AT remaining games and the number of sets displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the number of acquired numbers on the upper right of the screen are newly accumulated (the values up to that point are reset) ) (see FIG. 15(h)).

Here, it is assumed that the batting order bell (here, BEGr6 in FIG. 7) is internally won at the timing of FIG. 14(h). FIG. 15(h) shows how the correct operation order (here, right, middle, left) is reported to the batting order bell.

In the higher AT state, by following the operation sequence (FIG. 7) of the correct answer announced when the RPGr and BEGr1 to 6 are internally won, the lottery state shifts from RT1 to RT2, which is advantageous to the player. .

With the flow as described above, the upper AT state may continue with the bonus state B interposed therebetween, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the above example, an effect corresponding to each of the normal AT state, the higher AT state, and the bonus state B (the higher AT preparation state A and the higher AT preparation state B) is executed. Even in the state B, the performance of the upper AT state may be continued as it is. In this configuration, the performance is handed over to give the player the impression that the high-rank AT state is continuing, thereby making it possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration.

In addition, in the above example, the number of sheets obtained after entering the normal AT state is displayed continuously until the end of the bonus state B, giving the impression that the player is getting more profit. can give However, without being limited to this configuration, the acquired number may be once reset at the timing of the end of the advantageous section (FIG. 14(e)).

Also, in the above example, the acquired number is reset when the second AT state is reached (FIG. 15(h)). Depending on the specifications of the game machine, both the main control unit and the sub control unit are initialized when the advantageous section ends, or there is an upper limit on the number of acquisitions that can be displayed, but in any of these The above configuration can be applied. In the case of the latter specification, it may be configured to reset when the acquired number is close to the upper limit value, and to take over the acquired number in other cases. It should be noted that the number of remaining AT games and the display of the number of sets may be reset together with the number of acquired games.

Alternatively, the acquired number may be displayed until the acquired number reaches the upper limit, and when the acquired number reaches the upper limit, a specific effect may be performed without directly expressing the acquired number. For example, part of the presentation may be changed (change of background, change of character's costume), or display of number of acquired characters may be changed from display of number to some title. As an example, when the upper limit of the number of acquired sheets is 2400, a first specific effect is performed as a specific effect for 2400 to 3000 sheets, and a second specific effect is performed as a specific effect for 3001 to 4000 sheets. By executing an effect according to the number of acquired coins, it is possible to roughly grasp the number of acquired coins depending on the type of specific effect even if the specific value of the number of acquired coins cannot be grasped. can. Furthermore, in this case, even if the number of acquired coins is reset in the main control unit 300 when the advantageous section ends, the counting of the number of acquired coins may be continued in the first sub-control unit 400 .

An operation example in which the advantageous section lamp 190 and the performance lamp 191 are used will be described below.

First, the advantageous section lamp 190 is a lamp that can be lit during the advantageous section. By configuring the advantageous section lamp 190 to be lit in advantageous sections and turned off in non-advantageous sections, it is possible to let the driver know that they are in an advantageous section. However, not limited to such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. Here, the light may be turned on at the timing (FIG. 14(h)) of transition to the upper AT state), or may be turned on at the timing when the operation navigation is executed. Instead of the advantageous section lamp 190 that is lit at the above timing, a lamp that is at least in AT and is lit in accordance with the output timing of an external output signal indicating that AT is in progress may be provided. Alternatively, the light may be turned off in accordance with the timing at which the output of the external output signal is stopped.

14 and 15 collectively show the BB1 winning and the end of the advantageous section (FIGS. 14(e) and 15(e)), but in reality there is a wait between BB1 winning and BB1 activation. Since the advantageous section ends when the BB1 is activated, there is a time lag between the winning of the BB1 and the end of the advantageous section. The advantageous section lamp 190 is also turned off at the end of the advantageous section (see the lower diagram of FIG. 14).

The effect lamp 191 is a lamp for improving the interest of the game. In the examples of FIGS. 14 and 15, the gaming state is changed to a normal AT state, a higher AT state, a bonus state B (a higher AT preparation state A, a higher AT preparation state B), and a higher AT state. , the performance lamp 191 is configured to continue lighting until it returns to the normal state A after once entering the normal AT state. The performance lamp 191 may be turned off in the non-advantageous section, or may be turned on only in the AT state (normal AT state, upper AT state). However, with these configurations, the player may be given the impression that the AT state has ended even though the player has won BB1, which is profitable. In particular, unlike the advantageous section lamp 190, the effect lamp is conspicuous, and this impression may reduce the interest in the game. In the examples of FIGS. 14 and 15, by continuing lighting of the effect lamp 191, such an impression can be avoided. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the performance of the high-level AT state is continued in the bonus state B, by continuing lighting of the performance lamp 191, it is possible to let the player know that a series of advantageous states has occurred. .

[Configuration related to transition from advantageous section to non-advantageous section]
Hereinafter, a configuration regarding transition from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section will be described.

The gaming machine described above has an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section (Fig. 9). , a non-advantageous section is set (transition condition (L) in FIG. 9). In addition, in the advantageous section, a first gaming state (higher AT state) that is advantageous to the player may be set, and this first gaming state is based on the loss of the continuation right (AT remaining game number, remaining set number). game state is terminated. Furthermore, when the first condition (bonus winning) is established in the first gaming state, a non-advantageous section is set regardless of whether there is a continuation right or whether the limiter value has been reached (the transition condition in FIG. 9). (G)).

Even with the same first condition (bonus winning, transition condition (G) in FIG. 9), it is possible to shift from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section and to shift from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. The former corresponds to a transition from the higher AT state to the higher AT preparation state A, and the latter corresponds to a transition from the normal state A to the bonus state A.

Also, when the normal state B is shifted to the bonus state A, even if the first condition (bonus winning, transition condition (G) in FIG. 9) is satisfied, the advantageous section will not be transferred to the non-advantageous section. Instead, it is intended to maintain the advantageous section where you are staying.

In high-level AT state and normal AT state, if the first condition (bonus winning) is met, the setting or non-setting of the non-advantageous section is determined by referring to the presence or absence of the continuation right and the degree to which the limiter value has been reached. You may make it

In the above configuration, in addition to when the predetermined value reaches the limiter value, when the first condition is satisfied in the first game state, there is a non-advantageous section in which the first game state is not set regardless of whether or not there is a continuation right. set. That is, in addition to cases where the first gaming state ends, cases where the continuation right is lost, and cases where the predetermined value reaches the limiter value, there are cases where the first condition is satisfied. With this configuration, there are more opportunities for the degree of advantage to change due to the end of the first game state, and the game can be made more varied.

In the above-described embodiment, the upper AT state corresponds to an example of the first game state. , it is sufficient if the state is advantageous to the player managed by the presence or absence of the continuation right.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, winning a bonus (BB1, BB2, RB) corresponds to an example of the first condition. Alternatively, it may be internal winning of some role other than a bonus, or winning of some role other than a bonus. Also, the first condition may be that the bonus is won and activated (the bonus state is started), and the first condition is that a predetermined number of games has been obtained or a predetermined number of games have been completed. It may be used as a condition. In this case, the acquired number and the number of games played are not limited to the values in the first gaming state, and may be the values in the period including the first gaming state (for example, the AT state in this embodiment) or in the advantageous section. good. Furthermore, the first condition may be that each of the above conditions is established in a state where the number of games or the number of wins in an advantageous state is close to the limit value (or is fixed). Also, for example, when the first state is a so-called general AT state, if there are a predetermined number of remaining AT games or remaining sets, or if the number of games or the number of acquired sheets reaches the limit value, The first condition may be the case where an effect is being executed (or the case where the effect is not being executed) to notify that the player is present, or the above conditions may be combined with this.

In the above-described embodiment, the period from the internal bonus winning to the bonus winning is AT state (only the internal bonus winning does not end the advantageous section). In this configuration, the AT state is longer than the configuration in which the advantage interval ends with bonus internal winning, so the player's dissatisfaction may be alleviated.

In addition, in the gaming machine described above, an advantageous section is set when the second condition (for example, winning a payout combination and winning a transition lottery) is established in a non-advantageous section (the transition condition ( A)). Then, in the first case where the second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (higher AT preparation state A) set by the first condition being satisfied in the first gaming state (higher AT preparation state B case) is the second case (normal state B (the high-rank AT preparation state B surely shifts to the high-rank AT state and becomes more advantageous than the normal state B).

The above configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted. For example, the advantages may be the same, such as the normal state B in both the first case and the second case. However, if the configuration is such that the first case is more advantageous than the second case, even if a non-advantageous section is set due to the establishment of the first condition, the subsequent establishment of the second condition Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the first condition is met.

In the above-described embodiment, it is an example of the second condition that a winning combination with a payout is internally won and a transfer lottery is won. It may be winning or winning a prize, or may be winning a transfer lottery for each game. Also, for example, if the first condition is internal winning of a bonus, the second condition may be winning a bonus prize.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the upper AT state changes to the upper AT preparation state A via the upper AT preparation state A and then the upper AT preparation state B corresponds to an example of the first case. The case of B corresponds to an example of the second case. Regarding the first case and the second case, it is sufficient that the first case is more advantageous than the second case. In the second case, the normal state B may be established.

In the second case, the case where the upper AT state goes through the normal state A and then the normal state B is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the setting change changes to normal state A and then normal state B, when transition condition (F) changes to normal state A and then normal state B, and when transition condition (L) changes to normal state A and then normal state B It may be the case that

In addition, the game machine described above may be set to an operation effect game state (AT state) in which an operation effect is executed in an advantageous section, and the first case is more likely than the second case. It is easy to set the operation presentation game state. In this configuration, even if a non-advantageous section is set by the establishment of the first condition, the operation effect game state is easily set by the establishment of the second condition after that, so when the first condition is established It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from declining.

In addition, the game machine described above may be set to an operation effect game state (AT state) in which an operation effect is executed in an advantageous section, and the first game state (upper AT state) is the operation effect game state ( AT state). In this configuration, the player can be entertained by the change caused by the establishment of the first condition in addition to the operation effect.

Further, the gaming machine described above is configured to set an advantageous section when the first condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section. In this configuration, there are cases where an advantageous section is set and cases where a non-advantageous section is set depending on the establishment of the first condition. That is, by making the first condition play a different role, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the game machine described above may set a second game state (normal state B, CZ state, bonus state A) different from the first game state in the advantageous section, and this second game state When the first condition is satisfied in , it is configured to maintain the advantageous section. In this configuration, the first game state and the second game state behave differently when the first condition is established. can.

[Regarding production settings by the user]
In this embodiment, the user can change the setting of the effect. An example of effect setting by the user will be described below with reference to FIG. 16 .

First, FIG. 16(a) shows an example of a screen during a game. The user can operate a setting button 165 (to be described later) to display a menu screen for confirming information on the gaming machine and adjusting the effect. FIG. 16(b) shows an example of a menu screen for effect setting.

On the menu screen of FIG. 16(b), it is possible to select five items of "effect adjustment", "effect select", "payout table", "history", and "end". Selecting the item "effect adjustment" proceeds to the effect adjustment screen (Fig. 16(c)), and selecting the item "effect select" proceeds to the effect select screen (Fig. 16(f)). By selecting the "payout table" item, winning combinations and their payouts can be confirmed, and by selecting the "history" item, the game history can be confirmed. By selecting the item "end", the state before displaying the menu screen can be restored.

On the effect adjustment screen shown in FIG. 16(c), the items "Brightness", "Volume" and "Return" can be selected, and the current status of "Brightness" and "Volume" can be confirmed. Selecting the item "brightness" advances to the brightness adjustment screen (FIG. 16(d)), and selecting the item "volume" advances to the volume adjustment screen (FIG. 16(e)). Moreover, when the item of "return" is selected, it is possible to return to the menu screen (Fig. 16(b)). It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, by changing the display mode of "brightness" and "volume" in this effect adjustment screen and the brightness adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen which will be described later, it is possible to make a mistake in the adjustment target. can be made difficult.

On the brightness adjustment screen of FIG. 16(d), it is possible to check the current state of "brightness" and adjust it. Moreover, when the item of "Return" is selected, it is possible to return to the production adjustment screen (FIG. 16(c)). When the brightness is changed, the brightness of the side lamp 144 is changed according to the changed brightness. Also, the brightness of not only the side lamp 144 but also the liquid crystal may be changed.

On the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 16(e), it is possible to check the current state of "volume" and adjust it. Moreover, when the item of "Return" is selected, it is possible to return to the production adjustment screen (FIG. 16(c)). Note that when these volume changes occur, a test sound is output for confirming the changed volume. In addition, it is not limited to a voice such as a test sound, and may be configured to notify that the change has been made, such as by displaying the fact that the change has been made. may be provided.

On the effect select screen shown in FIG. 16(f), items of "custom", "BGM" and "return" can be selected. When the item "BGM" is selected, the BGM selection screen (FIG. 16(g)) is displayed. If the item "custom" is selected, it is possible to customize effects other than the BGM, such as a character that navigates the operation mode during the AT state, and the frequency of occurrence of the effects. Moreover, when the item of "return" is selected, it is possible to return to the menu screen (Fig. 16(b)).

On the BGM selection screen of FIG. 16(g), it is possible to confirm which one of "music A", "music B", "music C" and "music D" is set and change it. Moreover, when the item of "Return" is selected, it is possible to return to the production adjustment screen (FIG. 16(c)).

The above operation uses a setting button 165 (not shown in FIG. 1) provided separately from the operation means for progressing the game. This setting button 165 is shown in FIG. 16(h). In the following description, the center square button is referred to as center button 165C, and the up, down, left, and right buttons are referred to as up button 165U, down button 165D, left button 165L, and right button 165R, respectively. Among them, the center button 165C is used for displaying the menu screen and determining each item, and the other buttons are used for selecting each item and changing values. Actions by these operations are not particularly limited. For example, on the volume adjustment screen, the volume may be changed using the left button 165L and the right button 165R, or the volume may be changed using the up button 165U and the down button 165D. You may enable it to change the volume with any of these. In addition, the configuration is not limited to immediately reflecting the selected volume. For example, an item "OK" may be provided, and the selected volume may be reflected by selecting this item and operating the center button 165C. good too. In this case, the test sound may be output when the volume is selected, or the test sound may be output when the volume is reflected.

Note that such operation means is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and may be configured without left/right buttons or up/down buttons, for example. Further, for example, only the center button 165C may be provided, and after the menu screen is displayed by operating this, an operation means for progressing the game such as a stop button may be used. Also, a touch panel type that imitates such a button may be used.

It should be noted that the display of the menu screen and the like described above may be switched from the game screen, may be displayed on a part of the game screen, or may be displayed so that the game screen can be visually recognized. It is also possible to superimpose transparent displays. Also, values such as the number of acquired tokens, the total number of acquired tokens, and the number of stored tokens may be displayed on the menu screen or the like.

Further, when a plurality of display means such as sub-liquid crystals are provided, any one of them may be used to display a menu screen or the like.

In the above example, each screen other than the menu screen in FIG. 16(b) has no item for returning to the game, but may be provided with an item for "end" as in the menu screen in FIG. 16(b). Also, an item that allows immediate return to the menu screen of FIG. 16(b) may be separately provided. Further, the screens may be displayed in a tree structure so that a desired screen can be displayed immediately. In addition, when some game progress operation (for example, operation of the bet button or start lever) is performed, or when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed while the setting button 165 is not operated, these displays are displayed. may be terminated immediately. Further, the display may be ended immediately by selecting a specific item such as "determine" as described above.

Further, in the above example, the adjustment screen that enables various adjustments is called up via the menu screen, and is configured so that the setting cannot be changed at least by the first operation. Furthermore, since an opportunity is provided to check the current setting state before changing the setting, adjustment work can be performed after checking the setting state. As an example of such a configuration, there is a configuration in which the current setting can be confirmed by making the first operation a calling operation, and the setting can be changed by the second and subsequent operations. On the other hand, without being limited to such a configuration, the setting may be changed from the first operation. In this case, one operation for calling can be omitted, so that the operability and convenience in the adjustment work can be improved. can. In addition, for example, from a state where the menu screen is not displayed, by operating the left button 165L or the right button 165R, the volume adjustment screen may be displayed, or the volume may be adjusted immediately. It should be noted that the test sound may be output when the volume is adjusted by the player regardless of the contents of the display screen at that time. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that only the volume can be adjusted by operating the left button 165L or the right button 165R. In this case, the configuration may be such that the volume adjustment screen is not displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the contents changed on the effect menu screen of FIG. 16 are initialized by operating the settlement button 134 . With this configuration, the changes made by the previous player are not handed over to the next player, so that it is possible to prevent unintended contents from occurring in the setting of the presentation by the next player. In addition, for example, in the case of a medalless machine, a counting process may be executed to transfer medal information to an external device connected to the game machine (clear the number of medals on the game machine side and send the same number to the external device). Alternatively, the effect setting may be initialized by operating the counting operation means for executing this counting process, and the effect setting may be initialized by either operation of the counting operation means or the settlement button 134. may

When the effect menu screen of FIG. 16 or the like is displayed while the effect sound is being output, there is a possibility that the test sound on the volume adjustment screen becomes difficult to hear, for example. In view of this problem, while the effect menu screen or the like is being displayed, the volume of the effect sound may be lowered or the effect sound may not be output regardless of the set volume. In addition, in this configuration, by intentionally displaying the effect menu screen while the user is away from the seat, the volume can be temporarily reduced without changing the volume setting, thereby preventing annoyance to the surroundings.

[Regarding automatic initialization of production settings (1)]
In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the content changed on the effect menu screen of FIG. It adopts a configuration that automatically initializes the content that has been changed. An example of the operation of this configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing timing charts when automatic initialization is executed, and FIGS. It is a diagram. It should be noted that the timing chart of FIG. 17 starts from the state where the game has ended (all reels stopped, no bets).

First, at the timing of FIG. 17(a) and FIG. 18(a), the credit value is 4 and the volume is set to 3. A game screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157, indicating that the MAX bet button 132 is illuminated and ready for operation. The setting button 165 explained in FIG. 16(h) is shown at the lower left of FIG. 18(a).

Assume that the volume is adjusted using the setting button 165 . At the timing of FIG. 17(b) and FIG. 18(b), the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 16(e) is displayed. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen here is superimposed on a part of the previously displayed game screen and displayed transparently. Furthermore, at the timing of FIG. 17(c) and FIG. 18(c), the volume is changed from 3 to 4 on this volume adjustment screen, and at the timing of FIG. 17(d) and at the timing of FIG. has been changed from to 5. FIG. 17 also shows that the test sound is output at the timings of (c) and (d), and that the test sound is increased in accordance with the changed volume.

After that, it is assumed that the MAX bet button 132 is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen is finished, the subtraction of credits and the setting of the number of bets are executed, and the game start operation is performed. The timing of FIG. 17(e) and FIG. 18(e) show the state during play. Note that FIG. 17 shows that the betting sound when the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the production sound during the game are output with a changed volume.

The timing of FIG. 17(f) and FIG. 18(f) show the state after the game is over. Here, it is assumed that there is no payout in this game and the credit is 1. In this state, the MAX bet button 132 is turned off, indicating that the operation cannot be accepted.

Here, when the current user finishes the game and leaves the seat, if the content of the effect changed by this user remains as it is, the interest in the game will be lost if the content is not preferable for the next user. There is a risk of decline. This embodiment is a machine dedicated to betting three coins, and since the game cannot be played without adding credits when the MAX bet button 132 cannot be operated, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed in this state. A configuration (automatic initialization) is adopted in which the changed contents are returned to the initial state, assuming that the game is terminated when the game is over, that is, the player leaves the game machine without intention to continue the game. At the timing of FIG. 17(g) and FIG. 18(g), the changed volume is returned to the initial value (3) after 30 seconds have passed since the reels were stopped after the game was over. . It should be noted that since the volume change here is not performed by the player's operation, no test sound is output.

The initial volume value at this time may be the value at the time of shipment from the factory, or may be the value set by the store. In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, the central value of the five levels of volume is the initial value, but the level in which the volume can be set is not limited to this example. The maximum value may be set as

Also, in FIG. 18(g), a message (hereinafter referred to as effect setting guidance) indicating that settings related to effects can be set using the setting button 165 is displayed on the lower side of the screen of the effect image display device 157. It is This effect setting guide may not be displayed, but when the effect setting guide is displayed, it is possible to inform the player that the effect setting is possible. In the example of FIG. 18(g), the wording "volume/light amount setting" is used as the effect setting guide, but the wording "menu screen operation" may be used, and the effect setting is possible. Any display that indicates that there is In addition, by executing this together with the display simulating the setting button 165 as shown in FIG. Also, the display position is not limited to the edge of the screen as shown in FIG. 18(g), but may be displayed in the center of the screen.

As for the display timing of the effect setting guide, it may be the timing when the volume is initialized as in the example of FIG. may be displayed.

In FIGS. 17 and 18, the operation when the MAX bet button 132 cannot accept the operation after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reels stopped, but the MAX bet button 132 can be operated. If it is in the state, the changed content is maintained as it is even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reel was stopped. An example of this operation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing timing charts when automatic initialization is not executed, and FIGS. is. 19 and 20, the parts different from those in FIGS. 17 and 18 will be explained, and the explanation of the same parts as those in FIGS. 17 and 18 will be omitted.

First, at the timing of FIG. 19(a) and FIG. 20(a), the credit value is 6, and this credit value is different from the examples of FIGS. After that, it is assumed that the volume is changed and the game is played in the same manner as in the examples of FIGS. When FIGS. 20(b)-(e) are compared with FIGS. 18(b)-(e), only credit values are different. Also, at the timing of FIG. 17(f) and FIG. 18(f), the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which operation cannot be accepted due to insufficient credits, but at the timing of FIG. 19(f) and FIG. It shows that the MAX bet button 132 is ready to be operated. Furthermore, since the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which operation can be accepted, automatic initialization is not executed even after 30 seconds have passed since the reels stopped, and the changed contents are maintained as they are. At the timing of FIG. 19(g) and FIG. 20(g), the changed sound volume is maintained even after 30 seconds have passed since the reels stopped after the end of the game. Also, in this case, the display that enables setting of effects using the setting button 165 as shown in FIG. 18(g) is not executed.

According to the above-described configuration, changes made by the previous player are less likely to be handed over to the next player, and it is possible to prevent unintended contents when setting the effect by the next player.

[Regarding automatic initialization of effect settings (2)]
In FIGS. 17 to 20, a configuration has been described in which automatic initialization is executed when "the MAX bet button 132 cannot be operated" and "a predetermined time has passed since the reels were stopped." The present embodiment is a dedicated three-coin betting machine, and "the state in which the operation of the MAX bet button 132 cannot be accepted" is an example for determining the "state in which the game cannot be started". That is, regardless of the number of bets that can be set on the gaming machine, automatic initialization is executed when "the game cannot be started" and "a predetermined time has passed since the reels stopped", so that changes by the previous player can be performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the next player to take over.

Here, the judgment of the "state in which the game cannot be started" may be made by judging the credit value, or by judging the state of the bet button (whether it is in the operation accepting state). . If the MAX bet button 132 is an operation means that can set the maximum bet amount that can be set with the current credits, the MAX bet can be made even when the credits are less than 3 (the game cannot be started) on the 3-bet dedicated machine. The operation of the button 132 can be accepted. In such a configuration, the credit value may be determined.

In addition, there are a plurality of bet numbers for starting a game, and if a certain bet number among them cannot be set, a "game cannot be started with a certain bet number". Some amusement machines recommend playing a game with a certain number of bets, and in this case, the above state can be regarded as "a state in which the game cannot be started". That is, a configuration may be adopted in which "a state in which a game cannot be started with a certain number of bets" is determined in the same manner as "a state in which a game cannot be started", and automatic initialization is executed. That is, the configuration may be such that the automatic initialization is executed when "a game with a certain number of bets cannot be started" and "a predetermined time has passed since the reels were stopped". For example, in a game machine where 3-bet games and 2-bet games are possible, the advantage to the player is lower in the 2-bet game than in the 3-bet game (AT lottery is treated coldly, the winning probability of the role is low). If the number of bets recommended for the game is 3, such as low, etc.), if the number of credits is less than 3 (less than the recommended number of bets, "a certain number of bets" is 3), automatic initialization is performed. You may do so.

Depending on the amusement machine, the number of bets at which a game can be started differs depending on the game state. can be said to be "a state in which there is a certain number of bets that cannot be set due to insufficient credits among the number of bets that can be started". In this case, the number of bets to be determined for automatic initialization may differ according to the gaming state. By judging this state and making the configuration capable of executing automatic initialization, it is possible to make it difficult for the next player to take over the changes made by the previous player. In this determination, the value of credit may be determined, or the state of the bet button may be determined. It should be noted that the certain number of bets to be determined here may be the maximum number of bets at which the game can be started, or the minimum number of bets at which the game can be started. , may be all bet numbers that can be started. For example, if the gaming machine allows the game to be started with all the bet numbers of 1 bet, 2 bets, and 3 bets, the maximum bet is "3" and the minimum bet is "1". Become. Further, in the case of a gaming machine (two types of bet numbers) where the game can be started by betting two coins and betting three coins, the maximum bet value is "3" and the minimum bet value is "2".

[Regarding automatic initialization of effect settings (3)]
In FIGS. 17 to 20, a configuration has been described in which automatic initialization is executed when "the MAX bet button 132 cannot be operated" and "a predetermined time has passed since the reels were stopped." This "predetermined time elapsed since the reels stopped" is an example for determining the passage of time after the end of the game. ” may be determined. In addition, if the player performs some operation while measuring the passage of time, the measurement result up to that point is reset, and from there, "the predetermined time has passed without the player's operation". A configuration may be adopted in which determination is made and automatic initialization is executed. The means for executing automatic initialization and the means for measuring the passage of time (timing means) may be the same means. In 400, the means for executing automatic initialization and the means for measuring the passage of time may be different means, such as executing automatic initialization based on this result.

For example, depending on the display time of the screen related to the effect setting explained with reference to FIG. 16, the predetermined time may pass while the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 16(e) is being displayed. In such a case, automatic initialization may be executed and the volume after initialization may be displayed. In this configuration, if the sound volume changes while the player is looking away from the screen, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that something is wrong. If there is such a concern, the sound volume displayed while executing automatic initialization may not reflect this, and the sound volume before initialization may be continuously displayed. An example of the operation when this configuration is employed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is executed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the state in each timing of (h). 21 and 22, the portions different from those in FIGS. 17 and 18 will be described, and the description of the same portions as those in FIGS. 17 and 18 will be omitted.

First, the timings of FIGS. 21(a) to (e) and FIGS. 22(a) to (e) are the same as the timings of FIGS. 17(a) to (e) and the examples of FIGS. 18(a) to (e), respectively. is. The example of FIG. 21 differs from that of FIG. 17 in that the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 16(e) is displayed after the reels are stopped. Although the volume adjustment screen is not displayed at the timing of FIG. 17(f) and FIG. 18(f), the volume adjustment screen is displayed at the timing of FIG. 21(f) and FIG. 22(f). is shown. Further, FIG. 17 shows that although the volume is changed by automatic initialization while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the contents of the volume adjustment screen are displayed as they were before initialization. there is

The timing of FIG. 21(g) and FIG. 22(g) show that the game screen is displayed after the volume adjustment screen has ended due to the lapse of time. This state is similar to that shown in FIG. 18(g). Further, when the volume adjustment screen is newly displayed from this state, the current volume value (initialized value) is displayed. The timing of FIG. 21(h) and FIG. 22(h) show that the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the current volume value (initialized value) is displayed.

[Regarding automatic initialization of effect settings (4)]
FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the number of bets is set but not enough to start a game. In this example, it is assumed that the MAX bet button 132 is an operating means capable of setting the maximum number of bets that can be set with the current credits.

In FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the credit value is 2, the volume is set to 5, and all the reels are stopped. When the MAX bet button 132 is operated in this state, 2, which is the maximum number of bets that can be set with the current credits, is set, but the game cannot be started on the 3-coin betting machine. Then, it is assumed that a predetermined time has elapsed after the MAX bet button 132 has been operated without being operated. At this time, ``the state where there is a certain bet number (3 in this example) that cannot be set due to lack of credits out of the number of bets that can start the game'' is changed to ``a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation by the player''. Become. In the explanation so far, it has been explained that automatic initialization is executed in such a state.

However, when the number of bets other than 0 is set (bet state), it may be assumed that the player intends to continue playing the game, and the automatic initialization may not be executed. FIG. 23(a) shows that the volume setting is maintained without being initialized by setting the number of bets. In the example of FIG. 23(a), the case where the number of bets is set by operating the MAX bet button 132 has been described, but automatic initialization is not executed even if there is another bet button or a bet due to maintenance. may be configured.

FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the settlement button 134 is operated while "predetermined time has elapsed since the reels stopped" for automatic initialization. As described above, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the rendering settings including the volume are initialized. Therefore, for example, when the checkout button 134 is operated while "predetermined time has elapsed since the reels stopped" during automatic initialization, this timing ends and no new timing is performed. However, for example, when the settlement button 134 is operated while "predetermined time elapsed from reel stop" is being counted in automatic initialization, the effect setting is not initialized and the predetermined time elapses. You may make it perform time-measurement for. In FIG. 23(b), the settlement button 134 is operated while the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which it is not possible to accept the operation, and the "predetermined time has passed since the reels were stopped", and the predetermined time has elapsed since then. It is indicated that automatic initialization is being executed (here, the volume is set to the initial value of 3).

It should be noted that the above-described automatic initialization process may be any process that can realize the above operation. For example, it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed in a state of no operation, and then the acceptance state of the MAX bet button 132 is determined. Alternatively, it may be configured such that after determining whether the MAX bet button 132 has been accepted, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed without being operated. Further, the operation of the checkout button 134 may be, for example, a process in which the timing is terminated when the checkout button 134 is operated while a timer is used to measure the elapse of a predetermined time. Furthermore, in the case of the operation shown in FIG. 23B, the processing may be such that the value of the timer is initialized when the settlement button 134 is operated.

[Regarding automatic initialization of effect settings (5)]
In FIGS. 17 to 20, a configuration has been described in which automatic initialization is executed when "the MAX bet button 132 cannot be operated" and "a predetermined time has passed since the reels were stopped." In this example, all of the presentation contents are initialized together. However, for example, in a state where "the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which operation cannot be accepted", the brightness is "a first time has passed since the reels stopped", and the volume is "a second time has passed since the reels stopped". , the timing of automatic initialization may be changed for each type of setting object when executing automatic initialization. At this time, whether or not to execute automatic initialization is determined by the passage of a predetermined time, and the execution timing of subsequent automatic initialization is changed (for example, the brightness is automatically initialized immediately, and the volume may be automatically initialized after 5 seconds), or the elapse of a predetermined time for whether or not to execute automatic initialization may be changed for each type of setting object (for example, for brightness, the reel It is also possible to determine whether automatic initialization can be executed when 30 seconds have passed since the reel stopped, and whether the volume can be automatically initialized when 40 seconds have passed since the reel stopped.

Also, for example, since there are cases where it is preferable that the volume is louder than in the initial state, it is conceivable to prevent early initialization depending on the set value. From this point of view, for example, the "predetermined time" out of "state in which the MAX bet button 132 cannot accept operation" and "elapsed predetermined time from reel stop" may be changed according to the setting content. The timing of automatic initialization may be changed accordingly.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example employing a configuration in which the timing of automatic initialization is changed according to the set volume. In this example, a recommended volume setting value (volume 3 in FIG. 24) is set, and "predetermined time" out of "state in which operation of MAX bet button 132 cannot be accepted" and "elapsed predetermined time after reel stop" is configured to be higher when the volume is set higher than the recommended value than when the volume is set lower than the recommended value.

In the example of FIG. 24(a), in the state where "max bet button 132 cannot accept operation" and "reels are stopped", the volume is automatically initialized to the initial value ( In this example, the initial value of the volume is set by automatic initialization from the state where the volume is set to 4 than the time until 5) is set (in the case of arrow (a1) in FIG. 24(a)). The time until (in the case of arrow (a2) in FIG. 24(a)) becomes longer, and the state in which the volume is set higher than the recommended value is likely to be maintained.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 24(b), in the state where "the MAX bet button 132 cannot be operated" and "the reels are stopped", the volume is initialized by automatic initialization from the state where the volume is set to 1. The initial value of the volume is automatically initialized from the state where the volume is set to 5 than the time until the value (3 in this example) is set (in the case of the arrow (b1) in FIG. 24(b)). The time until setting (in the case of arrow (b2) in FIG. 24(b)) is longer, and the state in which the volume is set higher than the recommended value is likely to be maintained.

In addition, in FIG. 24(a), the recommended value is provided separately from the initial value, but the initial value and the recommended value may be the same as in FIG. 24(b).

Further, for example, there may be a case where automatic initialization is not performed depending on the setting content, such that automatic initialization is not performed if the volume is higher than the recommended value.

[About demo display]
In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a demo screen (demonstration display) is executed to liven up the atmosphere in the store when a game is not being played. The demo screen is a series of production images, character production, model introduction and model name are displayed. It is a composed image of about 90 seconds (hereinafter also referred to as demonstration image execution time). This demo screen is displayed after all the reels have stopped and the operation for starting the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation of the start lever 135 when winning a replay) is enabled, and the demo standby time is displayed. Although it is displayed after the elapse of (for example, 40 seconds), the demonstration screen is not displayed when the display of the demonstration screen is restricted.

In FIG. 25, in the normal state B where the display of the demo screen is allowed, after all the reels have stopped, the operation for starting the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation of the start lever 135 at the time of winning the replay) An example is shown in which the demo screen is displayed after the demo standby time has elapsed with the operation) enabled. When displaying the demo screen, the game screen (for example, timing (a)) is switched to the demo screen (for example, timing (b)), and then the demo screen is switched again to the game screen by accepting the game start operation. (For example, timing (c)) The state at timings (a) to (c) is shown in the lower part of Fig. 25. In this way, when displaying the demonstration screen in the normal state B, the demonstration screen 25, the game screen is displayed by receiving an operation to start the next game. However, the configuration may be such that the game screen is displayed after the demo screen execution time has elapsed, the demo screen may be displayed again after the demo screen execution time has elapsed, or the game screen may be displayed once after the demo screen execution time has elapsed. may be displayed for a predetermined time, and then the demo screen may be displayed again.

Also, in FIG. 26, as in FIG. 25, although the time corresponding to the demo standby time has passed with all the reels stopped, the AT state in which the display of the demo screen is regulated, An example in which the demo screen is not displayed is shown. Of the states shown in FIG. 9, in the normal state A and the normal state B, the display of the demo screen is basically permitted. , the display of the demo screen is restricted. In game states other than the normal state A and the normal state B, display of the demo screen is restricted.

In displaying (or restricting) the demonstration screen, the control method for its realization is not limited. For example, when the demonstration screen is permitted, the main controller 300 transmits a command to instruct the display of the demonstration screen to the first sub-controller 400, and when the demonstration screen is restricted, the main controller 300 sends the demonstration screen to the first sub-controller 400. The command for instructing display may not be sent to the first sub-controller 400 . In addition, the main control unit 300 uniformly transmits a command to instruct display of the demonstration screen, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the demonstration screen according to the presence or absence of restrictions on the demonstration screen. may In addition, the display of the demo screen is permitted by transmitting a specific command indicating that the operation for starting the next game can be accepted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. may be in a state where Further, the specific command is transmitted in the normal state, but the transition to the demo screen may be restricted by not transmitting the specific command in the AT state.

In the above example, the time elapsed after the operation for starting the next game becomes effective is measured to determine whether the demo standby time has elapsed. Any period (timing) during which all the reels are stopped may be used. For example, the elapsed time of the demonstration waiting time may be determined by measuring the time after all the reels are stopped.

The demo screen may be displayed when the checkout button 134 is operated independently of the elapse of the demonstration standby time, or the operation of the checkout button 134 and the display of the demonstration screen may be unrelated. good too.

[Regarding game status end display and demo display (1)]
For example, in the case of shifting from the AT state to the normal state A (FIG. 9(f)), it is assumed that the result screen is displayed when the AT state ends. At the time of this transition, the display of the demo screen changes from being restricted to being permitted. When the player leaves the game machine without intention to continue the game) and the display regulation of the demonstration screen is not lifted, the demonstration screen is not displayed, so that the atmosphere in the store cannot be livened up. In view of this point, the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the demonstration screen is allowed to be displayed after the result screen is displayed and before the next game is started. This configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when shifting from the AT state to the normal state A, and FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the timing chart of FIG.

In FIG. 27, all the reels are stopped in the last game in the AT state, and the result screen is displayed. ), FIG. 28(a)). In the example of FIG. 28(a), the number of AT state games played and the number of earned medals are displayed on the result screen. In addition, in the lower right of the display area of the effect image display device 157, a star mark suggesting a set value (equivalent to an example of a setting suggestion) is displayed, and furthermore, the text "Let's be careful not to get immersed" (an example of a warning) is displayed. equivalent) is displayed. Of these, the warning is displayed until a specified time elapses after the reel stops, and then cleared (FIGS. 27(b) and 28(b)).

In this embodiment, by delaying the time until the operation for starting the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation of the start lever 135 when winning a replay) becomes effective, the result screen, setting suggestion, We ensure the time to ensure that the alert is displayed. FIG. 27 shows that the operation for starting the next game is enabled in a state in which the result screen and setting suggestions are displayed after the prescribed time for calling attention has passed. As in this example, by ensuring the time for the result screen, setting suggestions, and alerts to be displayed without fail, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking these screens. In addition, for example, the demo screen is displayed after the warning is finished, such as by increasing the demo standby time without delaying the time until the operation for starting the next game becomes effective. may Note that the above configuration corresponds to an example in which the demonstration screen is displayed after the end of the alert.

When the operation for starting the next game becomes valid, the restriction on the display of the demonstration screen is released. In this state, when the demo standby time elapses without any operation by the player, the result screen is switched to the demo screen (FIGS. 27(c) and 28(c)). Furthermore, when a game start operation is performed, the reels start rotating, and the demo screen is switched to the game screen (FIGS. 27(d) and 28(d)). If the game start operation is performed before the demonstration standby time elapses, the result screen is switched to the game screen (FIGS. 27(d) and 28(d)).

In the above configuration, if the start operation is not performed while the demo screen is displayed, the demo screen is displayed again after the demo screen execution time has elapsed. Instead, the game screen may be displayed after the demo screen execution time has elapsed. In any of these configurations, when the result screen is switched to the demo screen, the demo screen is displayed when the demo screen is terminated afterward (end pattern by start operation, end pattern by demo screen execution time). The previous result screen is not displayed, and a screen (game screen or demo screen) different from the result screen is displayed. In this way, after the result screen is displayed, by preventing the result screen from being displayed again after the demonstration screen is displayed, it is possible to prevent the surrounding players from losing their desire to play.

In the example above, you can prevent the results screen from being displayed. Note that the "result screen" may be another display as long as it is a display when the AT state ends (hereinafter referred to as an end display). Moreover, it is not limited to the one displayed after all the reels have stopped, and may be displayed from the start of the final game in the AT state, for example. It should be noted that setting suggestion and attention calling may be started at the same timing as the end display, or may be started at a different timing. Also, as in the above example, it is not limited to the configuration of the end display in the "AT state", but even if it is intended for the end display in the "state where the demo screen is restricted" such as the bonus state or CZ state. good. That is, not only "the state in which the result screen is displayed in the AT state", but also in the "game state in which the demo screen is restricted and the end display is displayed at the end of the game state", the above configuration may apply. This configuration can prevent the termination indication from being left running.

Note that the demonstration screen may be displayed based on the operation of the settlement button 134 during execution of the end display. In addition, for example, in the case of a medalless machine, there is a case where a counting process is executed to transfer medal information to an external device connected to the gaming machine (clear the number of medals on the gaming machine side and send the same number to the external device). Alternatively, the demonstration screen may be displayed based on the operation of the counting operation means for executing this counting process. When adopting these configurations, it may be a condition that the display of the demo screen is permitted. Also, the end display may be maintained even if the settlement button 134 or the counting operation means is operated during execution of the end display.

In this embodiment, the operation for starting the next game is valid for both the demonstration standby time when displaying the demo screen from the end screen and the demonstration standby time in other situations (for example, FIG. 25). It is judged using the time after it became. As in this configuration, the same time may be used for determination in both the case of displaying the demo screen from the end screen and the case of displaying the demo screen from a screen other than the end screen, or different times may be used in each case. may be determined by The period (or start time) of the demo standby time may be any period (timing) when all the reels are stopped. It may be one that determines the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the attention is displayed together with the result screen, but the end screen and the attention may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. In addition, regarding the mode of displaying/hiding the alert, it is possible to display/hide it in any of the modes of "directly floating → immediately disappearing", "fade in → fade out", "directly floating → fade out", and "fade in → immediately disappearing". You can become Further, in the present embodiment, the alert is displayed in front of the result screen, but it may be displayed in a state embedded in a part of the end screen.

[Regarding game status end display and demo display (2)]
In the example of FIG. 27, there are four periods with different situations from when all the reels stop in the AT state to when the gaming state shifts to the normal state A and all the reels start spinning. Specifically, the period (period (T1) shown in FIG. 27) in which the result screen, the setting suggestion, and the attention are executed, and the attention is finished while the result screen and the setting suggestion are being executed, and the next game is not effective (period (T2) shown in FIG. 27), and the result screen, the attention is finished while the setting suggestions are being executed, and the next game start operation is effective. There is a period (period (T3) shown in FIG. 27) during which the demo screen is displayed (period (T4) shown in FIG. 27).

In each of these periods, when an error or power failure occurs and the system recovers from the error, the state before recovery may be displayed. Also, regardless of the state before recovery, a result screen or the like may be displayed, or a demonstration screen may be displayed. In addition, if the timing of the error or power failure is before the end of the warning, the result screen is displayed at the time of recovery, and if it is after the end, the demo screen is displayed at the time of recovery. The screen at the time of recovery may be changed depending on the timing at which the error occurs. In addition, while the bet operation may or may not be performed while the operation to start the next game is valid, the screen at the time of return may be the same or different in these cases. For example, during the periods (T3) and (T4), if a bet has been made, the result screen or the like may be displayed on the screen after returning, or a demo screen may be displayed. Further, during periods (T3) and (T4), if no bets have been made, a result screen or the like may be displayed on the screen after returning, or a demo screen may be displayed. In addition, the state after recovery for each period may be common, or may be different. Further, the state after recovery may be the same or different depending on whether the recovery from an error or the recovery from a power failure occurs.

In the example of FIG. 27, the AT state is the advantageous section, and the normal state A is the non-advantageous section (see FIG. 9). If the display on the screen changes from a restricted state to a permitted state, it can be applied even if both states are in an advantageous section (or a non-advantageous section).

Alternatively, if the menu screen explained with reference to FIG. 16 is displayed during each of the above periods and left unattended, the menu screen may be terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed and the state before the menu screen display may be displayed. good. In addition, regardless of the state before the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen may be terminated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a result screen or the like may be displayed, or a demonstration screen may be displayed. Further, the state after the menu screen is terminated may be common for each period, or may be different.

Also, the timing at which the demo screen is displayed may be matched with the timing at which the effect settings described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20 are initialized. For example, when the demo screen is displayed by ``demonstration waiting time has elapsed since the operation for starting the next game has been enabled'', ``the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which it is not possible to accept operation'' and ``the next game It is also possible to have a configuration in which automatic initialization is executed when the demonstration standby time has elapsed since the operation for starting the demonstration has been enabled. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the demonstration screen is displayed by operating the settlement button 134 (or the counting operation means) separately from the elapse of the demonstration standby time, the settlement button 134 (or the counting operation means) is operated. A configuration may also be adopted in which the effect setting is initialized when the

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as games. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, rock-paper game machines, smart balls, etc., which are used as media.

In addition, the slot machine is a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as running on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium contains digitized data corresponding to medals, and the game medium is inserted by inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. are not limited to those listed.

<<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above description,
game value storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game values that can be used for betting;
bet number operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 to 132) for setting the bet number;
a bet amount setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting a bet amount that is the value obtained by subtracting the gaming value based on the operation of the bet amount operating means;
An amusement machine comprising an effect setting means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of changing the setting of the effect by the player's operation,
The bet amount setting means is means for setting a predetermined value (for example, a game startable bet amount) as the bet amount based on the operation of the bet amount operating means;
In the first case where the predetermined value is not included in the range equal to or lower than the game value stored in the game value storage means, the effect setting means, without intervention of the player's operation, It is a means that can restore the original state in which the setting of the production is not changed (Fig. 17, [Regarding automatic initialization of production setting (1)], [Regarding automatic initialization of production setting (2)] reference),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
In a second case where the effect setting means includes the predetermined value within a range equal to or less than the game value stored in the game value storage means, the setting of the effect has been changed. Means for maintaining the changed state (see FIG. 19, [Automatic initialization of effect settings (1)], [Automatic initialization of effect settings (2)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The predetermined value includes the minimum number of bets that can be set (see [Automatic initialization of effect settings (2)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The predetermined value includes the maximum number of bets that can be set (see [Automatic initialization of effect settings (2)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
timer means (for example, main control section 300, first sub-control section 400) for measuring time during which the predetermined value is not included in the range below the game value stored in the game value storage means; ,
The effect setting means is a means capable of returning to the original state based on the result of measurement by the timing means (see [Automatic initialization of effect settings (3)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
If the timer means is operated by the player while measuring the time during which the predetermined value is not included in the range below the game value stored in the game value storage means, , is a means of re-measurement (see [Automatic initialization of effect settings (3)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Equipped with specific operation means (e.g., settlement button 134, counting operation means),
The game value storage means is means for clearing the game value stored by operating the specific operation means,
The effect setting means is a means capable of returning to the original state based on the operation of the specific operation means (see [Regarding effect settings by the user]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
a notification means (e.g., speakers 272, 277) capable of executing notification (e.g., test sound) corresponding to the setting when the setting of the effect is changed by the player's operation,
The notification means is a means that does not execute the notification when the original state is restored without being operated by the player ([Automatic initialization of effect settings (1)]. Since the volume change is not due to the player's operation, the test sound is not output"),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
a plurality of rotationally driven reels (eg, reels 110 to 112);
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
stop control means (e.g., main control unit 300) for stopping each of the plurality of reels being rotationally driven based on acceptance of a stop operation by the stop button;
game state setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting a predetermined game state (for example, AT state) advantageous to the player;
a display means capable of executing a plurality of displays (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising
The display means displays an end display (for example, a result screen) accompanying the end of the predetermined game state until before the start of the game in a game state (for example, normal state A) different from the predetermined game state. is a viable means,
The display means is a means capable of executing a demo display based on no game-related operation being performed (FIG. 25);
The display means is means for not executing the demo display in the predetermined game state (FIG. 26);
The display means may switch from the end display to the demo display in a state in which the end display is being executed and all of the plurality of reels are stopped (FIG. 27, [game state end display and demo display (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means may execute the demo display in a state where the end display is executed and the player is not operated after all of the plurality of reels have stopped (FIG. 27, [Game About end display of state and demo display (1)]),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game state setting means is means for setting a normal game state (for example, normal state A, normal state B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
The display means is means capable of executing the demo display when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the normal game state (FIG. 25).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means for, when the demonstration display is executed in the normal game state, displaying the display contents before execution of the demonstration display after the demonstration display is finished (FIG. 25).
The display means is means for executing a display different from the end display after the end of the demonstration display when the demonstration display is executed while the end display is being executed (FIG. 28).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display contents of the demonstration display executed in the normal game state are the same as the display contents of the demonstration display executed while the end display is being executed (FIGS. 25 and 28).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means capable of executing an addiction prevention display (e.g., calling attention) to call attention to addiction to the game during execution of the end display,
The display means is means for not executing the demonstration display during execution of the immersion prevention display (FIGS. 27 and 28);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the gaming machine described above, in which the degree of advantage differs depending on the set value,
The display means is means capable of executing a setting suggestion display (for example, a star mark in FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b)) suggesting the setting value during execution of the end display,
The display means is means for not executing the demonstration display while the setting suggestion display is being executed (FIGS. 27 and 28).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The display means is means capable of executing the immersion prevention display and the setting suggestion display during execution of the end display,
the execution time of the setting suggestion display is longer than the execution time of the immersion prevention display (FIGS. 27 and 28);
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
game value storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game values that can be used for betting;
A specific operation means (for example, the settlement button 134, counting operation means) for clearing the game value,
The display means may switch from the end display to the demonstration display regardless of the operation of the specific operation means in a state in which the end display is being performed and all of the plurality of reels are stopped. There is (Fig. 27),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
Section setting means (for example, main control unit 300) for setting an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section;
A game state setting means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of setting a first game state (for example, the upper AT state in FIG. 9) that is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
A game machine comprising
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section based on the fact that a predetermined value that changes as the game progresses reaches a limiter value in the advantageous section (for example, the transition condition ( L)),
The game state setting means is a means for terminating the first game state when the right to continue the first game state (for example, the number of AT remaining games) is lost (for example, the transition in FIG. 9). Condition (F)),
The interval setting means sets the non-advantageous interval regardless of whether the continuation right exists or whether the limiter value has been reached, when a first condition (for example, bonus winning) is established in the first gaming state. (for example, the transition condition (G) in FIG. 9),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section when a second condition (for example, winning a payout combination and winning a transition lottery) is established in the non-advantageous section (for example, 9 transition conditions (A)),
The first case in which the second condition is established in the non-advantageous interval set by the establishment of the first condition in the first gaming state is the first case in which the second condition is established in the first gaming state. In the non-advantageous section set by other than the establishment of one condition, it is more advantageous to the player than in the second case where the second condition is established ([Regarding the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section Configuration], "When the first case is configured to be more advantageous than the second case"),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Provided with effect means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of executing operation effects related to operations advantageous to the player,
The game state setting means is a means capable of setting an operation effect game state (for example, AT state in FIG. 9) in which the operation effect is executed in the advantageous section,
In the first case, the operation effect game state is more likely to be set than in the second case ("In the first case, It is easier to set the operation effect game state than in the second case”),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Provided with effect means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of executing operation effects related to operations advantageous to the player,
The game state setting means is a means capable of setting an operation effect game state (for example, AT state in FIG. 9) in which the operation effect is executed in the advantageous section,
The operation effect game state includes the first game state (in FIG. 9, the AT state includes a higher AT state),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section when the first condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (if the transition condition (G) in FIG. 9 is satisfied in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section ),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The game state setting means is a means capable of setting a second game state (for example, normal state B, CZ state, normal AT state in FIG. 9) different from the first game state in the advantageous section,
The section setting means is a means for maintaining the advantageous section when the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (shifting to the normal state B, CZ state, and normal AT state in FIG. 9). Advantageous section is maintained when condition (G) is established),
A game machine characterized by:

29 to 49, a game table (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. 29 to 49 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 29 to 49 in principle. In the description using FIG. 49, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 29 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, generally three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 30, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) are displayed on the left reel upper row symbols and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol to be displayed is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) is displayed on the upper stage. The symbol is the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the middle reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 lower stage (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol. The bottom symbol of the middle reel, the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the drawing) is the top symbol of the right reel, and the right reel 112 is the top symbol of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure). The symbols displayed on the middle row and the bottom row of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the drawing) are called right reel bottom row symbols, respectively, and the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed on the reels 110 to 112 through the reel window 113. Three of each are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine are displayed. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line (also referred to as a valid line) 114 . A winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a special machine for betting 3 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, the winning line 114 is not activated, and when the number of inserted medals is 3, a prize is won. Line 114 becomes active. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

In this embodiment, one pay line 114, specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, a middle pay line L1 composed of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel middle symbols is provided. . Note that the number of pay lines 114 is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the rising right pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

In the present embodiment, the lines other than the middle winning line L1 are used as a production line (hereinafter referred to as production line) DL. Specifically, the production line DL includes a right-downward-sloping production line DL1 composed of a left reel upper pattern, a middle reel middle pattern, and a right reel lower pattern, a left reel lower pattern, a middle reel middle pattern, and a right reel upper pattern. Right-rising production line DL2, lower production line DL3 consisting of left reel lower pattern, middle reel lower pattern and right reel lower pattern, left reel upper pattern, middle reel upper pattern and right reel upper pattern. An upper production line DL4 is provided. In the present embodiment, when a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination described later is stopped and displayed on a winning line or a performance line, it may be simply referred to as a winning combination being displayed.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called " The operation sequence for the stopping operation with the right reel 112 as the first stop reel is called the "reverse pressing operation sequence" or simply "reverse pressing". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to inform the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the side of the player). It is a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as a effect device that executes effects described later. Note that the effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect.

It should be noted that, even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, the L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A driving circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126 and the payout number indicator 127 is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 inputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like through the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-control section 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (nine types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 0 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 1 on the middle reel 111 has a "watermelon pattern", and the frame numbered 1 on the right reel 112 has a "replay pattern". ” are placed respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36. FIG. This figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations on the winning lines 114 corresponding to each winning combination, payouts, names and remarks of each winning combination.

Winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include BB, replay combinations 1-2, single-card combinations 1-5, and small combinations 1-54. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning hands in this embodiment, BB (big bonus) is a bonus hand (special hand) that shifts to a bonus game, and replay hands 1 and 2 (replay) are replayed without inserting new medals. As a replaying combination that makes possible, there is a case where it is distinguished from a winning combination and called an "operating combination". "Winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line, such as BB, replay combination 1 2 prizes are also included.

BB (big bonus) is a special combination (operating combination) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "blank 1-blank 1-BAR". Also, the flag is carried over for BB. That is, when the BB is internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). is maintained, the BB is internally won even after the next game, and the symbol combination "Blank 1-Blank 1-BAR" corresponding to the BB is aligned on the activated line and wins. .

The replay combinations 1 and 2 (replay) are winning combinations (operating combinations) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and are bets set in the game. The next game can be played with the number, and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay combination 1 and "bell-replay-watermelon" for replay combination 2. In addition, each of the replay combination 1 and the replay combination 2 may be referred to as "normal replay".

One-card hands 1 to 5 and small hands 1 to 54 are prize winning hands in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. Corresponding symbol combinations are shown in FIGS. Also, the corresponding payout numbers are as shown in FIGS.

For example, one role 1 is "replay-bell-watermelon", one role 2 is "replay-replay-seven 2", one role 3 is "replay-seven 2-seven 2", one role 4 is " Seven 2-Replay-Seven 2", and one-card role 5 is "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2". In addition, 1 piece role 1 is "common 1 piece role", 1 piece role 2 to 4 are each "irregular 1 piece role", 1 piece role 5 is "7 matching 1 piece role", small role 1 and small role 2 "Weak cherry" for each of the small roles 3 and 4, "Strong cherry" for each of the small roles 3 and 4, "Watermelon" for the small role 5, "Bell" for the small role 6, and "Single role" for the small roles 7 to 54. sometimes referred to as

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 shows the types, names and remarks of internal winning combinations.

FIG. 37 shows 13 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 0 to 12), which are combinations of the combinations described in FIGS. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery (internal lottery) at the start of the game.

Here, the winning probability of the internal winning combination will be outlined.

The winning probability of each internal winning combination is obtained by combining the numerical data within the range of the lottery data associated with each internal winning combination with the numerical data within the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery described later (this embodiment is obtained by dividing by 65536). The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each internal winning combination and loss are associated with each numerical range. In the internal winning combination lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with setting 1 to setting 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one internal winning combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. can be done.

Conditional device number 0 is a conditional device in which BB alone wins internally. In this condition device, the flag is carried over, and it is possible to win the BB after the game.

Condition device number 1 is a condition device in which replay hands 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, either replay combination 1 or 2 (normal replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 2 is a condition device in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of successful eye-pushing), one-piece role 5 (7 matching one-piece role) is won, while the right first stop is stopped If the timing of the operation is not suitable (in the case of a failure to press), one of 1-card roles 1 to 4 (common 1-card role, irregular 1-card role) is won. In addition, 1-card hand 2 to 4 (irregular 1-card hand) wins when Seven 2 can be suitably stopped on the right reel, but when the vicinity of Seven 2 cannot be suitably operated, 1 hand 1 (common one-card role) wins. For example, when the single hand 2 was able to suitably stop the seven 2 on the right reel 112, but could not properly stop the seven 2 on the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111, the single hand 3 can suitably stop the seven 2 on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, but when it is not possible to suitably stop the seven 2 on the left reel 110, the one-piece combination 4 can stop the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 A prize is awarded when the seven 2 can be properly stopped on the right reel 112 and the seven 2 can not be properly stopped on the middle reel 111 . In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, a prize is awarded to 1 piece combination 1 (common 1 piece combination).

It should be noted that the condition device number 2 (middle row 7 matching 1 card) of the present embodiment was a condition device that can win a 1 card role 5 (7 matching 1 card role) in the case of the right first stop, but this Separately, a conditional device may be provided in which 1-card hand 5 (7 matching 1-card hand) can be won in the case of middle first stop or left first stop. In addition, in order to make it possible to win 1-piece role 5 (7 matching 1-piece role), it is not limited to 3 choices of left first stop, middle first stop, and right first stop, but condition device so that there are 4 choices may be provided, and a condition device may be provided so as to provide six options.

Condition device number 3 is a condition device in which minor wins 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, either a small win 1 or 2 (weak cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 4 is a condition device in which minor wins 3 and 4 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, either a small win 3 or 4 (strong cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

The condition device number 5 is a condition device in which the minor winning combination 5 is independently elected internally. In this conditional device, a small winning combination of 5 (watermelon) is won.

Condition device number 6 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, right, a small win 6 (bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, right, middle, one of the small wins 7 to 22 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the left first stop is performed, any of the small hands 23, 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, 54 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the left first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if the stop operation is other than the left first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 7 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6-22, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, and 52 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, right, middle, a small win 6 (Bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the left first stop is performed, there is a case where one of the small wins 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, 52 is won. be. That is, if the stop operation is the left first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if the stop operation is other than the left first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 8 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, a small win 6 (bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, right, left, one of the small wins 23 to 38 is won. Also, when a stop operation other than the middle first stop is performed, You may win one of the That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the middle first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 9 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6, 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 23-38, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, and 52 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, right, left, a small win 6 (Bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, one of the small wins 23 to 38 is won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the middle first stop, you may win any of the small wins 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 41, 42, 45 to 48, 51, 52 be. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the middle first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 10 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, middle, a small win 6 (Bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, left, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 is won. Also, when a stop operation other than the right first stop is performed, any of the minor wins 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37, 38 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the right first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the right first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 11 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6, 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 39-54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, left, a small win 6 (bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, middle, one of the small wins 39 to 54 is won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the right first stop, you may win any of the small wins 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35, and 36. be. That is, if the stop operation is the right first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the right first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

The conditional device number 12 is a conditional device in which the small winning combination 6 is independently elected internally. In this conditional device, a small winning combination of 6 (Bell) is won.

For the above-mentioned conditional device numbers 6 to 11, the operation conditions for winning the bell (minor combination 6) (here, pressing order, hereinafter, correct pressing order) are defined. In the following description, conditional device numbers 6 to 11 may be collectively referred to as push order bells. In the case of internal winning of these conditional device numbers 6 to 11, if the stop operation matches the pressing order of the respective correct answers, the bell (minor combination 6) is won. On the other hand, when the stop operation does not match the pressing order of the correct answer, the internally won one-card combination other than the bell (minor combination 6) is preferentially stopped. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct pressing order, it may be lost. It is good also as composition which always wins a prize for some role.

<Playing state of the slot machine>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 38 is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 38(a) shows an RT-based game state. The lottery data for the internal winning combination lottery process described above is set for each RT-type game state. Also, FIG. 38(b) shows the game state of the AT system. The AT game state is a game state related to the effect.

The RT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a normal game state, a BB internal winning state, and a BB game state.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the normal game state which is the initial state, when the BB is internally won, the BB internal winning state is set. The BB internal winning state is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the BB is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a suitable timing, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB corresponding to this flag is displayed. It is a game state that can be played. In addition, in the BB internal winning state, when the symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning BB is displayed, the state is shifted to the BB game state. This BB game state shifts to a normal game state when a prescribed number of medals (11 in this embodiment) is paid out. As described above, the BB game state of the present embodiment is not a game state with a high degree of profit for the player.

On the other hand, the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 can be roughly classified into a normal state, an aiming effect preparation state (hereinafter simply referred to as a preparation state), an AT state, and a standby state. And prepare. Note that the normal state, the ready state, and the standby state may be collectively referred to as the non-AT state. The AT state is a state in which the frequency of execution of effects related to the content of the stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "operation navigation") is higher than in the non-AT state. That is, in the AT state, the frequency of performing operation navigation that notifies information including the operation timing (symbols, etc.) or the operation order (push order) of the stop operation is non-AT so that the player can obtain an advantageous result. It is set higher than the state.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, which is the initial state, the state shifts to the preparation state. In the preparatory state, in the game in which the first ``1 card 1 to 5'' (1 card with 7 in the middle row) is internally won, the ``aim effect'' (details will be described later) is executed to aim at the Seven 2 symbols. In other words, the "aiming effect" is a symbol suggesting effect in which the pressing order and symbol suggestions for winning a prize of 1 piece 5 (7 matching 1 piece role) is one of the above operation navigation. In addition, in the ready state, if an internal winning is made for the pressing order bell, the operation navigation indicating the correct pressing order is always executed. In addition, in the preparation state, when a rare combination (specifically, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a watermelon) is internally won, an additional lottery, a stock lottery, and a special zone lottery are executed.

In the game in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 (7-card 1-card in the middle row) is internally won in the ready state, when 1-card hand 5 (7-card 1-card hand) is won, the game shifts to AT state. On the other hand, if you did not win a prize of 1 piece 5 (7 pieces 1 piece) in the first internal winning game of 1 pieces 1 to 5 (1 piece 7 pieces in the middle), that is, any of 1 pieces 1 to 4 When winning a prize (common 1-card role or irregular 1-card role), the game shifts to a standby state. That is, the preparation state is a period until the first aiming effect is executed.

The standby state is a state that continues for at least a predetermined period of time (10 games in this embodiment), and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, in a game in which 1-card hands 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 in the middle row) are internally won, Seven 2 symbols are displayed. Execute the "aiming effect" to aim. In addition, in the standby state, if an internal winning is made for the pressing order bell, operation navigation is executed to indicate the correct pressing order with a probability of 1/2. Specifically, in the present embodiment, if the bell is internally won in the pressing order of an odd number of times, the operation navigation is executed, and if the bell in the pressing order of the even number is internally won, the operation navigation is not executed. In addition, in the standby state, in a game in which a rare combination (specifically, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a watermelon) is internally won, no additional lottery, stock lottery, or special zone lottery is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the standby state is less advantageous than the ready state.

The standby state shifts to the AT state when winning a prize of 1-card hand 5 (7-card 1-card hand) in a game in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 (middle row 7-matched 1-card) is won after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, in a game in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 cards in the middle row) is internally won after the predetermined period has passed, if 1-card hand 5 (7 cards with 1 card) is not won, that is, 1-card hand 1 4 (common 1-card role or irregular 1-card role), the standby state is set again. This standby state that is set again is also a state that continues for at least a predetermined period of time (10 games in this embodiment), like the first standby state. As described above, in the present embodiment, in a game in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 (7-card 1-card in the middle stage) is internally won after the elapse of a predetermined period of time, the waiting state is entered if 1-card hand 5 (7-card 1-card hand) is not won. It repeats.

In the AT state, when an internal winning is made for the pressing order bell, operation navigation indicating the correct pressing order is always executed. In addition, in the AT state, when a rare combination (specifically, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a watermelon) is won internally, an extra lottery, a stock lottery, and a special zone lottery are executed. The AT state is the state with the highest degree of advantage in the AT-based game state. The AT state ends when the given number of games (the number of AT games) is completely consumed, and shifts to the normal state.

As described above, the advantage of the game state of the AT system of the present embodiment is set in the order of AT state>preparation state>standby state. It should be noted that the BB game state of the present embodiment is not a game state in which the degree of profit is high for the player as described above, but is lower in advantage than in the standby state.

In addition, in the preparation state of the present embodiment, if the bell is internally won in the order of pressing, the operation navigation is always executed to indicate the order of pressing the correct answer. The probability does not have to be 100%. Of course, even in such a case, the ready state is more advantageous than the standby state.

In addition, in the standby state, when the internal winning of the pressing order bell is won, operation navigation is executed to indicate the correct pressing order with a probability of 1/2, but the method is not limited to the above method. For example, if the condition device numbers 6 to 8 are internally won among the push order bells, operation navigation is executed, and if the condition device numbers 9 to 11 are internally won, operation navigation is not executed. good too. In addition, in the case of providing an internal winning combination of the push-order bell capable of paying out two types of medals (for example, 13, 7, etc.) depending on the operation content, the pushing order for paying out a small number of medals is selected. You may make it perform the operation navigation shown. In addition, in the standby state, when an internal winning is made for the pressing order bell, the operation navigation indicating the correct pressing order is executed with a probability of 1/2. No need to run. Of course, even in such a case, the standby state is less advantageous than the ready state.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 in accordance with the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state (RT type game state), and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. I do. As a result of the internal lottery, when any internal winning combination is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internal winning combination is activated (the flag of the internal winning combination turns ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon wins. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control is performed to shift the game state (RT system game state, AT system game state). do. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 40) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 39 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 41(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 41(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 41(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 41(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 41(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 41(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 42(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 42(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 42(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 42(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 42(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 42(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 42(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 42(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Aiming direction>
Hereinafter, the aiming effects of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. FIG. Aim effect is a design suggestive effect that can be executed when internally elected in 1-card roles 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 matching 1 card in the middle row) in the preparation state or standby state. The content of the operation for winning a prize is reported. For example, (1) in the ready state or in the standby state, when the internal winning of 1-card hands 1 to 5 (1 card in the middle row of 7) is performed, the symbol suggesting effect is surely executed, and (2) in the ready state, a predetermined number of games. (3) In the ready state, the N-th time (N is an integer of 2 or more) 1 If you win internally in 1 to 5 (middle row 7 matching 1 piece), execute the design suggestion effect, (4) If the number of medals acquired in the preparation state is a predetermined number or more, 1 piece 1 to 5 ( (5) In the preparation state, if the number of executions of operation navigation for winning the bell in the order of pushing the bell is a predetermined number or more, and 1 to 5 wins (6) If the winning combination internal lottery process in the ready state has a number of losses equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, 1-card combination 1 to 5 ( The aiming performance may be executed when an internal winning is made in the middle row (7 matching cards, 1 card). Specifically, in the aiming effect, as shown in FIG. 44 to be described later, the effect is to show the right first stop operation and to stop the Seven 2 symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112 at the middle position. The image d11 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. FIG.

FIG. 43(a) shows a time chart in the case of successful eye-pushing in a game in which the aiming effect in the ready state (hereinafter also referred to as the initial aiming effect) is executed. In this case, in the game (a1 shown in FIG. 43(a)) in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 (7-card 1-card in the middle stage) in the ready state was won, 1-card hand 5 (7-card 1-card hand) was won. , the AT state is started from the next game (see FIG. 38(b)). In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, the preparation state is started after executing the winning notification (specifically, the notification indicating AT winning) in the last part of the continuous effect executed in the normal state. It's becoming

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the transition of the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 in the case of successful eye pressing in the game in which the aiming effect is executed for the first time.

Here, the N-th game is one game in the preparation state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an image d10 of preparation state effect indicating the preparation state.

The M-th game is the final game in the ready state, and indicates time point a1 in FIG. 43(a). The M game is a game in which 1-card hands 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 cards in the middle row) are internally won. ) is displayed. After that, the player succeeds in the eye-pushing operation, and since "seven 2 - seven 2 - seven 2" are aligned on the winning line L1, the player wins a prize of 1 piece 5 (7 sets of 1 piece) and 1 medal. is paid out. In addition, the effect image display device 157 displays a effect image d12 indicating that the player has won a 1-card role 5 (7-match 1-card role).

The M+1th game is the game following the game in which the first aiming effect is executed, and is the first game in the AT state. In the M+1 game shown in FIG. 44, the CRL bell was internally won, so operation navigation indicating the correct operation order is executed, and the effect image d13 indicating the right, middle, left operation order is displayed on the effect image display device 157. be.

On the other hand, FIG. 43(b) shows a time chart in the case where the eye pressing fails in the game in which the first aiming effect is executed, and the eye pressing succeeds in the game in which the second aiming effect is executed. . In this case, in the game (b1 shown in FIG. 43(b)) in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 (1 card in middle row 7-match) in the ready state is internally won, 1-card hand 5 (7-match 1 card) is not won. Therefore, the standby state is started from the next game (see FIG. 38(b)). Then, in a game (b2 shown in FIG. 43(b)) in which 1-card hand 1 to 5 (middle row 7-match 1-card) is internally won after a predetermined period of waiting state has elapsed, 1-card hand 5 (7-match 1 card) Since the player has won a prize, the AT state is started from the next game (see FIG. 38(b)).

In the present embodiment, the aiming effect is executed in the game in which the first one-card role 1 to 5 (1 card in the middle row of 7) is internally won after the predetermined period of waiting has passed, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, (1) in the game in which the N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2) times of the waiting state 1-card combination 1 to 5 (1 card in the middle row of 7) is internally won, an aim effect may be executed, (2) If the number of medals acquired is less than a predetermined number in the standby state and an internal win is made for 1-card hand 1 to 5 (1 medal with 7 in the middle row), the aim effect may be executed, 3) In the standby state, if the number of executions of the operation navigation for winning the winning order of the bell in the pressing order is less than a predetermined number of times, and if the internal winning of 1-card hand 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 in the middle row) is won, the aiming effect will be executed. (4) If the number of times of losing is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the winning combination internal lottery process in the standby state, and if one-card combination 1 to 5 (1 piece with 7 in the middle row) is internally won, aim to produce. may be executed.

FIG. 45 shows the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the effect image display device 157 in the case where the eye pressing fails in the game in which the first aiming effect is executed and the eye pressing succeeds in the game in which the second aiming effect is executed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the production mode of.

Here, the N-th game is one game in the preparation state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an image d10 of preparation state effect indicating the preparation state.

The M-th game is the final game in the ready state, and indicates the time point b1 in FIG. 43(b). The M game is a game in which 1-card hands 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 cards in the middle row) are internally won. ) is displayed. After that, since the player failed in the eye-pushing operation, the symbol combination of "Replay-Seven 2-Seven 2" is aligned on the winning line L1, and the player wins 1-card role 3 (irregular 1-card role), and medal 1. sheets are paid out. On the effect image display device 157, the effect image d11 is continuously displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a game in which the aiming effect is executed, even if the eye-pushing operation succeeds and the one-piece role 5 (7-match one-piece role) is won, the eye-pushing operation fails and one piece is won. Even if the player wins any of the combinations 1 to 4 (common single-card combination, irregular single-card combination), the player obtains the same profit in the game. In other words, even if a player who is not good at spot-pressing fails in spot-pressing, the same profit is given as in the case of successful spot-pressing, so there is no loss in the game.

In the game in which the aiming effect of the present embodiment is executed, one medal is paid out regardless of whether the eye pressing operation succeeds or fails, but the specification is not limited to this. It is only necessary that the player obtains the same profit in the game. For example, in a game in which an aiming effect is executed, three medals may be paid out regardless of the operation content, and medals may be awarded depending on whether the player wins or loses in the replay. may not be paid out.

The M+1th game is the game following the game in which the first aiming effect is executed, and is the first game in the standby state. In the standby state, a standby state effect indicating the standby state is executed, and the effect image d14 indicating the standby state is displayed on the effect image display device 157 . In the effect image d14, the background is grayed out, and the word "waiting" is displayed so that the fact that the player is waiting until the Seven 2 symbols are arranged can be specified. Note that the effect image d14 is displayed in the M+1th game, but may be displayed at the timing of the final stop operation in the Mth game, or at the timing of failure in eye pressing. Also, the effect image d14 is displayed in the standby state, but the image d10 in the preparation state may be displayed.

The M+α-th game is the final game in the standby state, and indicates time point b2 in FIG. 43(b). The M+α-th game is a game in which 1-card hands 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 in the middle row) are internally won after a predetermined period of play in the standby state. , an effect image d11 showing the operation content for winning a prize of 1-card 5 (7-match 1-card) is displayed. After that, the player succeeds in the eye-pushing operation, and "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2" are aligned on the winning line L1, so that 7 sets of 1 wins and 1 medal is paid out. The effect image display device 157 displays the effect image d12 indicating that the winning combination of 7 pieces is won.

The M+α+1th game is the game following the game in which the second aiming effect is executed, and is the first game in the AT state. In the M+α+1th game shown in FIG. 45, the CRL Bell was internally won, so operation navigation indicating the correct operation order is executed, and the effect image d13 indicating the right, middle, left operation order is displayed on the effect image display device 157. be.

Although not shown, if the player fails in the eye-pushing operation in the M+α game and wins any of the 1-card roles 1 to 4 (common 1-card role, irregular 1-card role), the M+α+1 game starts waiting again.

<Production when winning BB>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing changes in the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the BB is internally won. It should be noted that the AT system states of each game shown in FIG. 46 are all normal states.

In the present embodiment, when BB, which is a bonus combination, is internally won, the notification effect suggesting that the bonus combination is internally won is not executed. That is, in the game in which the bonus hand is internally won, the effect image display device 157 displays the effect image suggesting that the bonus hand is internally won (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to BB, the symbols constituting BB, the bonus hand winning, etc.). Direct or indirect wording indicating In a broad sense, notification effects mean all effects that notify information about internal winning hands, such as operation navigation that shows information about operation details such as the order of pressing and patterns, and suggestive effects that indirectly suggest internal winning hands. etc.

Here, with reference to FIG. 47, the execution frequency of the notification effect when the BB is internally won will be described in detail. FIG. 47 is a table showing the occurrence frequency of the notification effect for each internal winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 47, when the BB is internally won, no notification effect is performed regardless of the AT system game state. On the other hand, if you explain the case of internal winning in 1 piece role 1 to 5 (1 piece with 7 middle rows), it will be notified with a probability of 0.5% in normal state, 100% in preparation state, and 5% in AT state. A production is to be executed. The notification effect of 100% execution in the ready state is the first aiming effect. When the notification performance is executed in the normal state, then the state is directly shifted to the AT state, and when the notification performance is executed in the AT state, the AT is added.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the 1-card combination 1 to 5 (1 card with 7 in the middle row) is internally won, the notification effect is executed, and when the BB is internally won, the notification effect is not executed. This is because the flag for the small role cannot be carried over to the next game or later, but the flag for the bonus role can be carried over to the next game or later. This is to reduce the risk of missing a small win in the game by increasing the occurrence frequency of .

In the case of internally winning the small win 5 (watermelon), the notification effect is executed with a probability of 100% regardless of the AT system game state. In the case of internal winning of replay combinations 1 and 2 (replay), the notification effect is executed with a probability of 20% in the normal state, 100% in the ready state, and 60% in the AT state.

It should be noted that the numerical value of the occurrence frequency of the notification effect for each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 47 is an example, and is not limited to the numerical value shown in FIG. is.

An execution frequency of 0% is included in a category with a low execution frequency (execution ratio), and an execution frequency of 100% is included in a category with a high execution frequency (execution ratio). Note that 0% is not strictly limited to 0%, and may include a probability that is extremely close to 0%, such as 0.001%.

Returning to FIG. 46, the case where BB is internally won will be described. In this case, only the background image d1 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and no notification effect is performed.

The (N+1)th game is the game following the lost winning, and is the game in which the BB is internally won in the normal game state. In this case, as described above, in the game in which the BB is internally won, the notification effect suggesting that the bonus combination is internally won is not executed. The effect image display device 157 only displays the background image d1. It should be noted that BB is not won in the N+1 game.

The N+2th game is the game following the game in which the BB is internally won, and in the BB internal winning state, the replay role 1 and 2 (replay) are internally won, and the replay role 1 (normal replay) is won. be. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 46, the notification effect is not executed (when the internal winning combination in FIG. 47 is replay and no effect is selected). Therefore, the effect image display device 157 only displays the background image d1.

The N+3th game is the game following the game in which the replay was internally won, and is the game in which the small winning combination 5 (watermelon) was internally won in the BB internal winning state and the small winning combination 5 (watermelon) was won. A pattern combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is displayed on the effect line DL1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47, the notification effect is executed with a probability of 100%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. d15 is displayed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, if the hit is successful in the ready state, it is possible to shift to the AT state with a high degree of advantage. While reducing the feeling of that, you can enjoy the feeling of a bonus that requires conventional eye-pushing.

In addition, even if the eye-pushing is unsuccessful, the same number of medals is provided as if the eye-pushing is successful, so there is an advantage that even a player who is not good at eye-pushing does not suffer a loss in the game.

In addition, when a small winning combination that is not carried over to the next game is internally won, the occurrence frequency of the notification effect is set to be higher than the bonus combination that can be carried over to the next game or later, so if a small winning combination is internally won, there will be a loss. can reduce the risk of

In the RT game state, the player may perform most of the game in the normal game state, or may perform most of the game state in the BB internal winning state. In the former case, as shown in FIG. 49(b), it is assumed that a certain amount of profit can be obtained with BB, and in the latter case, it is assumed that there is not much profit with BB.

<Other Modifications>
In the above embodiment, BB, which is a bonus hand, is a single hand, but it may be a double hand of BB and another hand (hereinafter referred to as a special hand). FIG. 48 shows an outline of Modification 1 in which BB is a duplicate role. FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing the types of BB and special combination, and symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, and FIG. 48(b) is a diagram showing the combination of types of internal winning combinations related to BB. is.

Even in the case where BB exists as an overlapping role with the special role as in Modification 1, the notification effect suggesting that BB has been internally won is not executed as in the case of internal winning of BB in the above-described embodiment. . During the BB internal winning state, the BB winning flag is carried over and the special role is likely to be won. Therefore, when BB is internally elected, the execution frequency of the notification effect is reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 48(a) and (b), in the case of internal winning of any of the overlapping hands of BB+minor wins A to F, the correct operation order for winning the minor wins A to F When the stop operation is performed with , the small wins A to F are won, and when the pattern corresponding to the BB is pressed in other operating order, the BB is won.

Also, in the above embodiment, the bonus combination is one type of BB, but two types of bonus combinations may be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), two types of bonus hands, BB1 and BB2, are provided. BB1 can be internally won in the case of a two-coin bet, and BB2 can be internally elected in the case of a three-coin bet. (Modification 2). In the case of modification 2 as well, when BB1 or BB2 is internally won, the notification effect regarding BB internal winning is not executed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(b), two types of bonus combinations BB1 and BB2 may be provided (Modification 3). In the case of modification 3, it is a BB game state that brings profit to the player. Of course, when the BB1 or BB2 is internally won in the third modification, the notification effect regarding the BB internal winning is not executed. In addition, although the notification effect regarding the BB internal winning is not executed, for example, when a small win and a duplicate win are made, such as BB1 + Cherry, BB2 + Watermelon, a performance suggesting Cherry, Watermelon, etc. may be performed, and bonus winning A bonus pattern may be notified after the continuous effect related to . In this case, it can be said that the frequency with which the symbol is suggested in the winning game is higher for the 7-match combination than for the bonus.

In addition, in the case of Modification 2 and Modification 3, BB1 and BB2 may be a single internal winning combination or a duplicate internal winning combination.

Also, in the modified examples 1 to 3, similarly to the above embodiment, when the internal lottery is won in the 1-card hand 1-5 (1 card in the middle row of 7) in the preparation state or the standby state, the aiming effect, that is, the notification effect is executed. It seems to be

<Other game machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) for determining an internal winning combination based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, the main control unit 300, game state control processing);
Production means for executing production (for example, first sub-control unit 400, first sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, etc.);
A game machine comprising
The game state includes an AT state (for example, an AT state) that notifies an operation mode corresponding to the internal winning combination,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a symbol suggestive effect (e.g., aiming effect, suggestive effect, etc.) that suggests stopping a predetermined symbol (e.g., Seven 2 symbol, etc.),
The game state control means is means for starting the AT state when the suggested predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the game in which the effect means executes the symbol suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 43, etc.). ),
The game state control means is means for not starting the AT state when the suggested predetermined symbol is not stop-displayed in the game in which the effect means executes the symbol suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 43, etc.). ,
This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, even if the player misses the pressing, the state can be shifted to the standby state, so that the player can enjoy the feeling of the conventional bonus that requires the pressing while reducing the feeling of loss. In other words, the player can feel the exhilaration of aligning the patterns.

Note that "predetermined symbol" means one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and "predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed" includes a predetermined symbol combination.

In the above first basic configuration,
The game state control means is means for starting a standby state (e.g., standby state) when the suggested predetermined symbol is not stop-displayed in the game in which the effect means executes the symbol suggestion effect (e.g., , FIG. 43, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A0.

In the above preferred configuration A0,
The game state control means is means for continuing the standby state for at least a predetermined period (for example, 10 games, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the symbol suggestion effect after continuing for the predetermined period of time.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A1.

According to the preferred configuration A1, it is possible to compensate by securing the standby state for a predetermined period.

In the above preferred configuration A0 or A1,
The game state includes a preparation state (for example, aiming effect preparation state),
The production means is capable of executing the design suggestion production in the preparation state,
The standby state is a gaming state with a lower degree of advantage than the preparation state (for example, FIG. 43, etc.),
This is referred to as preferred configuration A2.

According to the preferred configuration A2, when the advantage of the standby state is high, there is a concern that the standby state will be prolonged. Therefore, by making the advantage of the standby state lower than that of the ready state, the extension of the standby state is prevented. can be done.

In the above preferred configuration A2,
The AT state is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the preparation state,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A3.

According to the preferred configuration A3, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in aiming at the AT state, and further to improve the willingness to participate in eye pressing.

In the above preferred configuration A2 or A3,
The game state control means is means for continuing the preparation state until the effect means executes the symbol suggestion effect for the first time.
This is referred to as preferred configuration A4.

According to the preferred configuration A4, it is possible to improve willingness to participate in the period until the occurrence of the first symbol suggestion effect.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) for determining an internal winning combination based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, the main control unit 300, game state control processing);
Production means for executing production (for example, first sub-control unit 400, first sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, etc.);
Value giving means for giving value (for example, main control unit 300, medal payout processing, etc.);
A game machine comprising
The game state includes an AT state (for example, an AT state) that notifies an operation mode corresponding to the internal winning combination,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a symbol suggestive effect (e.g., aiming effect, suggestive effect, etc.) that suggests stopping a predetermined symbol (e.g., Seven 2 symbol, etc.),
The game state control means controls, in a game in which the effect means executes the symbol suggesting effect (hereinafter referred to as a first game), a case where the suggested predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as a first game). is a means for initiating the AT state (for example, FIG. 43),
The game state control means is means for not starting the AT state when the suggested predetermined symbol is not stopped and displayed in the first game (hereinafter referred to as the second case). 43, etc.),
The value imparted by the value imparting means in the first case in the first game is the same as the value imparted by the value imparting means in the second case in the first game (for example, FIG. 44, 17, etc.),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, even a player who is not good at spot pressing can succeed in spot pressing when he or she fails in spot pressing while enjoying the feeling of a bonus that requires conventional spot pressing. The player will not suffer any loss in the game, since the same profit is awarded as if he had played the game.

It should be noted that "predetermined symbol" includes one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and "predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed" includes a predetermined symbol combination. Also, the value imparting means corresponds to a medal payout process that imparts game media such as medals or electronically stored game values (for example, one, two, etc.), but is not limited to this. is displayed, it means that the value "you can play the game again with the same number of bets" is given. In addition, even when BB is internally elected and the symbol of BB is displayed, the value of "the BB gaming state can be started" is given. In addition, even if the winning combination is not won, the value of "0 coins (more strictly speaking, minus 3 coins when the number of bets is 3)" is given. This includes not only the provision of a positive value but also the provision of a negative value as a result of a game.

In the above second basic configuration,
In the first case, the first combination (for example, 7 matching 1 sheet combination) is displayed,
In the second case, a second role (for example, an irregular 1-card role) is displayed,
The internal winning result determining means selects an internal winning combination in which the first combination and the second combination are simultaneously won in the first game (for example, 1-card combination 1-5 (1 card in the middle row)). is the determining means,
The value imparted by the value imparting means when the first combination is displayed in the first game (for example, payout of one medal) is the same as the value imparted by the value imparting means in the first game. It is the same as the value given when the role is displayed (for example, one medal is paid out) (for example, FIGS. 44, 17, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B1.

According to the preferred configuration B1, the same profit can be obtained whether the first combination wins or the second combination wins, so the player does not feel disappointed.

In preferred configuration B1,
In the second case, the game state control means is a means for starting a standby state,
A playground characterized by:

In the second basic configuration or preferred configuration B1,
In the second case, the game state control means is a means for starting a standby state,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B2.

In preferred configuration B2,
The game state control means is means for continuing the standby state for at least a predetermined period (for example, 10 games, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the symbol suggestion effect after continuing for the predetermined period of time.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B3.

According to the preferred configuration B3, it is possible to compensate by securing the standby state for a predetermined period.

In preferred configurations B2 or B3,
The game state includes a preparation state (for example, aiming effect preparation state),
The production means is capable of executing the design suggestion production in the preparation state,
The standby state is a gaming state with a lower degree of advantage than the preparation state (for example, FIG. 43, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B4.

According to the preferred configuration B4, when the advantage of the standby state is high, there is a concern that the standby state may be prolonged. Therefore, by making the advantage of the standby state lower than that of the ready state, the extension of the standby state is prevented. can be done.

In preferred configuration B4,
The AT state is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the preparation state,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B5.

According to the preferred configuration B5, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate aiming at the AT state, and further to improve the willingness to participate in eye-pushing.

In preferred configurations B3, B4 or B5,
The game state control means is means for continuing the preparation state until the effect means executes the symbol suggestion effect for the first time.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B6.

According to the preferred configuration B6, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the period until the occurrence of the first symbol suggestion effect.

(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination based on lottery information (for example, the main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing,
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, the main control unit 300, game state control processing);
Production means for executing production (for example, first sub-control unit 400, first sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, etc.);
A game machine comprising
The internal winning combination includes a first combination (for example, 7-match 1-card combination) in which the winning result cannot be carried over to the next game or later, and a bonus combination (eg, BB) in which the winning result can be carried over to the next game or later. included,
The game state includes an AT state (for example, an AT state) that notifies an operation mode corresponding to the internal winning combination,
The effect means is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, aim for 7 effect, suggestive effect, etc.) for informing information about the internal winning combination,
The game state control means is means for starting the AT state when a first symbol (for example, Seven 2 symbol) corresponding to the first combination is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 43),
The game state control means is means for not starting the AT state when the first symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 43),
The winning judgment means judges the winning of the first winning combination when the first symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the winning of the winning combination of 7 symbols in a single winning combination),
The effect means is means for executing the notification effect at a first frequency (for example, 0%) when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination,
The effect means is means for executing the notification effect at a second frequency (for example, 100%) higher than the first frequency when the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination.
This is the third basic configuration.

According to the third basic configuration, while the user can enjoy the feeling of a bonus that requires conventional eye-pushing, a small winning combination that is not carried over to the next game or later is more popular than a bonus combination that can be carried over to the next game or later. By increasing the occurrence frequency of the performance, it is possible to reduce the risk of missing a small winning combination.

The term "first symbol" means one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and "the first symbol is stopped and displayed" includes the first symbol combination.

In the third basic configuration above,
The notification effect is a pattern suggesting effect (for example, aiming effect) that suggests the pattern of the stop target,
The effect means, when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, is the specific symbol suggestion, which is the symbol suggestion presentation suggesting that the specific symbol corresponding to the bonus combination be stopped at the first frequency. is a means for executing production (for example, FIG. 47, etc.),
The effect means is a first symbol suggesting effect, which is the symbol suggesting effect suggesting that the first symbol is stopped at the second frequency when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. (for example, FIG. 47),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C1.

According to the preferred configuration C1, it is possible to facilitate the eye-pushing operation by direct and concrete design suggestive effects.

It should be noted that "a specific pattern" means one pattern or a plurality of patterns, and "a specific pattern is stopped and displayed" includes a specific pattern combination.

In preferred configuration C1,
The game state control means is means for starting the AT state when the suggested first symbol is stopped and displayed in a game in which the effect means executes the first symbol suggesting effect (for example, , FIG. 43),
The game state control means does not start the AT state and waits (for example, , standby state) (e.g., FIG. 43),
The game state control means is means for starting a bonus game state (for example, BB game state) when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 38(a), etc.),
This is referred to as preferred configuration C2.

According to the preferred configuration C2, it is possible to shift to the standby state even if the player misses the button press, so it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss.

In preferred configuration C2,
The game state control means is means for continuing the standby state for at least a predetermined period (for example, 10 games, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first symbol suggestion effect after continuing for the predetermined period of time.
This is referred to as preferred configuration C3.

According to the preferred configuration C3, it is possible to compensate by securing the standby state for a predetermined period.

In preferred configuration C2 or C3,
The game state includes a preparation state (for example, aiming effect preparation state),
The production means is capable of executing the first symbol suggestion production in the preparation state,
The standby state is a gaming state with a lower degree of advantage than the preparation state (for example, FIG. 43, etc.),
This is referred to as preferred configuration C4.

According to the preferred configuration C4, when the degree of advantage of the standby state is high, there is concern about prolongation of the standby state. Therefore, by making the degree of advantage of the standby state lower than that of the ready state, the extension of the standby state is prevented. can be done.

In preferred configuration C4,
The AT state is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the preparation state,
This is referred to as preferred configuration C5.

According to the preferred configuration C5, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in aiming at the AT state, and further to improve the willingness to participate in eye pressing.

In preferred configuration C4 or C5,
The game state control means is means for continuing the preparation state until the effect means executes the first symbol suggestive effect for the first time.
This is referred to as preferred configuration C6.

According to the preferred configuration C6, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the period until the occurrence of the first symbol suggestion effect for the first time.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to

50 to 76, a game table (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. 50 to 76 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. 50 to 76 in principle. In the explanation using FIG. 76, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. FIG. 50 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 51 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 50 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction through a reel window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. . 52(a), the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 1) are the upper row symbols of the left reel, and the middle row of the left reel 110 ( The symbol displayed at position 2 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 2) is the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is on the left. The bottom symbol of the reel, the symbol displayed on the top of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure; symbol position 4) is the top symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; symbol position 5). The symbol displayed on the middle reel 111 is the middle reel symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is the middle reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the right reel 112 is the upper stage symbol (also called symbol position 6). The symbol displayed at position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7) is the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle stage of right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is displayed on the right. The symbols displayed on the middle stage of the reel and the bottom of the right reel 112 (the position of 9 in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 9) are called the right reel bottom stage symbols, respectively, and each symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed in the reel window 113. 3 vertically on each reel 110 to 112, 9 in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The reel backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, there is provided an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through the space between them. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

In this embodiment, one prize line 114 is provided, which is a middle prize line L1 composed of a left reel middle pattern (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle pattern (symbol position 5) and a right reel middle pattern (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at the stop position of the symbols visible through the reel window 113, and whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 is displayed. It is the line on which it is determined whether FIG. 52(a) shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a machine dedicated to betting 3 coins. 114 is valid. When the winning line 114 becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 .

Note that the number of pay lines 114 is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 lines of the upward-sloping pay lines may be set as valid pay lines, or the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (more specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. ) is a lamp that informs the player.

The medal insertion buttons (also referred to as bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132 are also referred to as bet operations, and the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. In this embodiment, light emitting bodies (called bet button lamps) are provided inside the bet buttons 130 to 132, and when the bet buttons 130 to 132 can be operated, the light emitting bodies are turned on to notify the player. can let you know. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139. As shown in FIG. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are called stop operations, the first stop operation is called the first stop operation, the next stop operation is called the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called the third stop operation. Also, the reel targeted by the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the middle reel 111 as the first stop reel is called the "middle push operation". The operation order of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". In this embodiment, a luminous body (referred to as a stop button lamp) is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the luminous body is lit and the player can inform

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .
A sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A title panel 160 and sound holes 143 are provided on the upper portion of the front door 102 .

A liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 is provided in an area including the reel window 113 and its surroundings. Among them, the area inside the reel window 113 (the area covering the reel window 113) is a so-called transmissive liquid crystal through which the reels 110 to 112 can be visually recognized.

FIG. 51 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-like body surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a first sub control board that constitutes the first sub control unit 400 is stored. A board storage case 220 is provided. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the second sub-control board constituting the second sub-control section 500 is accommodated above the liquid crystal display device 157. A second sub-board case 230 and an upper speaker 272 are provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

The PUSH button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the PUSH button 192, the presence/absence of awarding of a privilege is reported in an effect suggesting the awarding of a privilege, and the type of privilege to be granted is reported. In this embodiment, a light emitter (called a PUSH button lamp) is provided inside the PUSH button 192, and when the PUSH button 192 can be operated (can be accepted as a valid operation), the light emitter is turned on. to let the player know.

50 and 51, a liquid crystal display device 157 includes a transmissive color liquid crystal panel 157A having color filters, and a backlight 157B for illuminating the color liquid crystal panel 157A from the rear side with white light. LCD display. The liquid crystal panel 157A is a rectangular panel extending both inside and outside the reel window 113, and a well-known liquid crystal panel can be adopted. The liquid crystal panel 157A includes, for example, R, G, and B (red, green, and blue) filters for each pixel, and liquid crystal is placed between transparent substrates such as glass on which signal lines, switching elements, pixel electrodes, and the like are formed. A liquid crystal layer is formed by encapsulation, and this liquid crystal layer is formed by being sandwiched between polarizing plates. The liquid crystal panel 157A may be of a normally white type, but is of a normally black type in this embodiment.

The backlight 157B includes a light guide plate, a light source such as an LED for irradiating the light guide plate with light, an optical member such as a diffusion sheet, and the like. The light sources are arranged, for example, along the edge of the light guide plate, and the light propagating inside the light guide plate is reflected to the liquid crystal panel 157A. In the case of this embodiment, the backlight 157 has an opening 157b that penetrates through the reel window 113 in the thickness direction, and the player can view the reels 110 to 112 without using a light guide plate or the like. is visible. In this embodiment, backlights provided on the reels 110 to 112 are used to illuminate the portion where the liquid crystal panel 157A and the opening 157b overlap from behind. Since the reel band has a white (or milky white) color, the reels 110 to 112 can provide illumination that is not much different from the backlight 157. The part or the whole of them can also be called a backlight unit.

In the case of the present embodiment, the opening 157b is a single rectangular opening adapted to the outline of the reel window 113, but three openings corresponding to the reels 110-112 are provided so as to fill the gaps between the reels 110-112. It may be a single rectangle. It is possible to improve the definition of the image displayed in the position of the gap between the reels.

By blocking the transmission of light in the liquid crystal panel 157A, a black image appears to be displayed to the player. In addition, since the R, G, and B backlights are evenly transmitted, it appears to the player that a white image is being displayed. When a white image is displayed, it can be said that the transparency of the liquid crystal panel 157A is increased. can be said to be a state Such display of black, white, or other colors can be controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

The operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52(b) to (d). This figure shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

FIG. 52(b) shows the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 when the slot machine 100 is not powered. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 157 is a normally black type liquid crystal display. 112 is in a state where visual recognition is difficult.

An example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 is shown in FIG. This figure shows that the entire liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image. At this time, in the area inside the reel window 113, the light from the reels 110 to 112 or the like serves as a backlight, and the image of the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes visible in this area. However, due to the image display of the liquid crystal display device 157, the visibility of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 is lowered (becomes difficult to see).

FIG. 52(d) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 different from that of FIG. 52(c). In this figure, the area inside the reel window 113 is different from the example (c) above. Specifically, by displaying a white image in the area inside the reel window 113, the visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is ensured. In this embodiment, this state occurs after a medal is inserted in one game. That is, in order to ensure the visibility of the reels 110-112, the state shown in FIG. 52(d) is maintained at least from the start of rotation of the reels 110-112 to the stop thereof.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 157 is provided with a region covering the reel window 113, and a white image is displayed to make the reels 110 to 112 visible, and an image other than white is displayed. In this case, the visibility of the reels 110-112 is reduced. In addition, in order to improve the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, it is possible to set the transmittance for each pixel constituting the image in the area covering the reel window 113, and the transmittance is set to 100% (transmissive state). may

Note that the device for displaying images is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. A display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the player can see the entire screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel patterns. A ROM 306 storing arrays and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. A ROM, which is a storage device having a storage area for temporarily storing data, and a RAM, which is a storage device having a storage area for temporarily storing data, are used together.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, the PUSH button 192 sensor, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted into the game. Detects the submit operation when submitting as The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass through. It becomes L level every time. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from when it once goes to L level until it goes to L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 339 (announcement lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information display) 126 and a drive circuit 328 for driving the payout number indicator 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 monitors the voltage of the power supply. If the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 comprises a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. , an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, game medal insertion) are provided to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. available lamp 124, bet button lamp, reel backlight, stop button lamps 137-139, PUSH button lamp, etc.) are connected.

A sensor circuit 423 is provided in the first sub-controller 400 , and the CPU 404 monitors the detection result of the door sensor 421 that detects opening of the front door 102 .

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs display control of the effect image display device 157 .

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 534 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to this VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Pattern arrangement>
The pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (nine types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in this embodiment, the frame numbered 0 on the left reel 110 has a "bell pattern", the frame numbered 1 on the middle reel 111 has a "watermelon pattern", and the frame numbered 1 on the right reel 112 has a "replay pattern". ” are placed respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. This figure shows the types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations on the winning lines 114 corresponding to each winning combination, payouts, names and remarks of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include replay combinations 1-18 and small combinations 1-54. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning hands in this embodiment, the replaying hands 1 to 18 (replays) are replaying hands that can be played again without inserting new medals, and are distinguished from the winning hands and are called "operating hands". Sometimes. "Winning" in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a payout of medals (does not accompany payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. including the winning of

Re-playing hands 1 to 18 (replay) are winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and bets set in the game. The next game can be played with the number, and no medals are paid out. Corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. For example, replay combination 1 is "replay-replay-replay". In addition, replay hands 1 and 2 are "normal replay", replay hand 3 is "right blue replay", replay hand 4 is "middle right blue replay", replay hand 5 is "left and right blue replay", replay. Role 6 is "left center right blue replay", replay role 7 is "left center blue replay", replay role 8 is "left blue replay", replay roles 9 to 11 are "BAR remove replay", replay role 12 may be referred to as "BAR replay", replayed hands 13 to 16 as "Momo 7 lost replay", and replayed hands 17 and 18 as "Momo 7 replay". Hereinafter, replay hands 3 to 8 may be collectively referred to as "blue 7 replay".

Further, the symbol combination "BAR-BAR-BAR" for the replay combination 12 is a pseudo RB symbol combination, and the symbol combination for the replay combination 17 is "BAR-SEVEN 2-BAR" and the replay combination 18. "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2", which is a symbol combination of , is a pseudo BB symbol combination.

Small combinations 1 to 54 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. Corresponding symbol combinations are shown in FIGS. Also, the corresponding payout numbers are as shown in FIGS.

For example, each of the small hand 1 and the small hand 2 is "weak cherry", each of the small hand 3 and small hand 4 is "strong cherry", the small hand 5 is "watermelon", the small hand 6 is "bell", the small hand 7 to 54 are sometimes referred to as "one piece hand".

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 and 60 are diagrams showing the types, names and remarks of internal winning combinations.

59 and 60 show 20 types of internal winning hands (conditional device numbers 1 to 20), which are combinations of the hands explained in FIGS. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery (internal lottery) at the start of the game.

Here, the winning probability of the internal winning combination will be outlined.

The winning probability of each internal winning combination is obtained by combining the numerical data within the range of the lottery data associated with each internal winning combination with the numerical data within the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery described later (this embodiment is obtained by dividing by 65536). The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each internal winning combination and loss are associated with each numerical range. In the internal winning combination lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with setting 1 to setting 6 that differ in the winning probability of at least one internal winning combination, and the staff of the game parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. can be done.

Condition device number 1 is a condition device in which replay hands 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, either replay combination 1 or 2 (normal replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 2 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2 and 3 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of successful pushing of the Seven 1 symbol on the right reel 112), the replay combination 3 (right blue 7 replay) is won, while the right Although it is the first stop, if the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (in the case of failure to hit the Seven 1 symbol), a replay combination 1 or a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won. In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 3 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2 and 4 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of successful pushing of the seven 1 symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112), the replay combination 4 (middle right blue 7 replay) While winning, if the timing of the stop operation is not suitable for the right first stop (if the seven 1 symbol on the middle reel 111 or the right reel 112 fails to hit), replay role 1 or replay role 2 (normal win a replay). In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 4 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2 and 5 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, when the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of successful pushing of the Seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110 and the right reel 112), replay combination 5 (left and right blue 7 replay) won On the other hand, if it is the right first stop but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (if the seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110 or the right reel 112 fails to hit), replay combination 1 or replay combination 2 (normal replay ). In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 5 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2 and 6 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of successful pushing of seven 1 symbols on the left reel 110, the middle reel 110 and the right reel 112), the replay combination 6 (left middle right Blue 7 replay), while the right first stop, but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (if the left reel 110, the middle reel 110 or the right reel 112 fails to hit the Seven 1 symbol), replay Win a winning combination 1 or replay winning combination 2 (normal replay). In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 6 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2 and 7 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of successful pushing of the seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111), the replay combination 7 (left middle blue 7 replay) While winning, if the timing of the stop operation is not suitable even though it is the first stop on the right (if the seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110 or the middle reel 111 fails to hit), replay role 1 or replay role 2 (normal win a replay). In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 7 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2 and 8 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, when the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of successful pushing of the Seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110), the replay combination 8 (left blue 7 replay) is won, while the right If it is the first stop but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (in the case of failure to hit the Seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110), a replay combination 1 or a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won. In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Operation conditions (here, pressing order and operation timing) for winning a blue 7 replay (any of replay combinations 3 to 8) are defined for the above conditional device numbers 2 to 7, respectively. That is, in the case of a right first stop and a successful hit of the Seven 1 symbol, the blue 7 replay wins. In the following description, the conditional device numbers 2 to 7 may be collectively referred to as "press order pattern blue 7 replay".

Condition device number 8 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2, 9 to 12 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, when the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of success in hitting the BAR symbols on the left reel 110, the middle reel 110 and the right reel 112), the replay combination 12 (BAR replay) While winning, if the timing of the stop operation is not suitable for the right first stop (if the BAR pattern on the left reel 110, the middle reel 110 or the right reel 112 fails to hit), replay combination 1, replay combination 2 (normal replay) or replays 9 to 11 (replay out of BAR). In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won. In the following description, the condition device number 8 may be referred to as a push order pattern BAR replay.

Condition device number 8 is a condition device for winning a pseudo bonus (pseudo RB), and when a replay combination 12 (BAR replay) is won, a pseudo RB game is started.

Condition device number 9 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2, 13 to 15, and 18 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of success in pushing seven 2 symbols on the left reel 110, the middle reel 110 and the right reel 112), the replay combination 18 (peach 7 replay ) while winning, if the timing of the stop operation is not suitable for the right first stop (in the case of failure to hit the seven 2 symbol on the left reel 110, the middle reel 110 or the right reel 112), replay combination 1, Win a replay combination 2 (normal replay) or replay combinations 13 to 15 (pink 7 miss replay). In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 9 is a condition device for winning a pseudo bonus (pseudo BB), and when a replay combination 18 (Peach 7 replay) is won, a pseudo BB game is started.

Condition device number 10 is a condition device in which replay hands 1, 2, 9, 11, 16 and 17 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, if the timing of the right first stop and stop operation is suitable (in the case of successful hitting of seven 2 symbols on the middle reel 111 and BAR symbols on the left reel 110 and right reel 112), the replay combination 17 ( Momo 7 replay) while winning, when the timing of the stop operation is not suitable although it is the first stop on the right (in the case of failure of the seven 2 symbol on the reel 111 and the BAR symbol on the left reel 110 or the right reel 112), A replay combination 1, a replay combination 2 (normal replay), a replay combination 9, 11 (bar loss replay) or a replay combination 16 (pink 7 loss replay) are won. In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Incidentally, the conditional device number 10 is a conditional device for winning a pseudo bonus (pseudo BB), and when a replay combination 17 (Peach 7 Replay) is won, a pseudo BB game is started. Further, in the following description, the condition device numbers 9 and 10 may be collectively referred to as "push order pattern pink 7 replay".

Condition device number 11 is a condition device in which minor wins 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, either a small win 1 or 2 (weak cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 12 is a condition device in which minor wins 3 and 4 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, either a small win 3 or 4 (strong cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

The condition device number 13 is a condition device in which the minor winning combination 5 is internally elected alone. In this conditional device, a small winning combination of 5 (watermelon) is won.

Condition device number 14 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, right, a small win 6 (bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, right, middle, one of the small wins 7 to 22 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the left first stop is performed, any of the small hands 23, 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, 54 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the left first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if the stop operation is other than the left first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

The condition device number 15 is a condition device in which the minor combinations 6-22, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, 52 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, right, middle, a small win 6 (Bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 is won. In addition, when a stop operation other than the left first stop is performed, there is a case where one of the small wins 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, 52 is won. be. That is, if the stop operation is the left first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if the stop operation is other than the left first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 16 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, a small win 6 (bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, right, left, one of the small wins 23 to 38 is won. Also, when a stop operation other than the middle first stop is performed, You may win one of the That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the middle first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 17 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6, 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 23-38, 41, 42, 45-48, 51 and 52 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, right, left, a small win 6 (Bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, one of the small wins 23 to 38 is won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the middle first stop, you may win any of the small wins 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 41, 42, 45 to 48, 51, 52 be. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the middle first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 18 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 54 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, middle, a small win 6 (Bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, left, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 is won. Also, when a stop operation other than the right first stop is performed, any of the minor wins 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37, 38 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the right first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the right first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

Condition device number 19 is a condition device in which minor combinations 6 to 7, 12 to 13, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35, 36, and 39 to 54 are duplicated and internally elected. In this conditional device, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, left, a small win 6 (bell) is won. Also, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, middle, one of the small wins 39 to 54 is won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the right first stop, you may win any of the small wins 9, 10, 13 to 16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35, and 36. be. That is, if the stop operation is the right first stop, the payout is 8 or 1, and if it is other than the right first stop, the payout is 1 or 0.

The condition device number 20 is a condition device in which the small combination 6 is independently elected internally. In this conditional device, a small winning combination of 6 (Bell) is won.

For the conditional device numbers 14 to 19, operation conditions for winning the bell (minor win 6) (here, pressing order, hereinafter, correct pressing order) are defined. In the following description, conditional device numbers 14 to 19 may be collectively referred to as push-order bells. In the case of internal winning for these conditional device numbers 14 to 19, if the stop operation matches the pressing order of the respective correct answers, the bell (minor win 6) is awarded. On the other hand, when the stop operation does not match the pressing order of the correct answer, the internally won one-card combination other than the bell (minor combination 6) is preferentially stopped. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct pressing order, it may be lost. It is good also as composition which always wins a prize for some role.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 61 is a game state transition diagram of the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 has a normal state, a chance zone (sometimes referred to as CZ) state, and an AT state. Also, the AT state is subdivided into an AT normal state, a pseudo BB state, a specialized state, and an ending state. In addition, in this embodiment, an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section are provided in addition to the above three game states. The advantageous section consists of most of the period of the normal state, the CZ state, and the AT state, and the non-advantageous section consists of a part of the period of the normal state.

The CZ state and the AT state are states in which operation navigation, which will be described later, is executed, and information that is advantageous to the player is reported, so it can be said that they are broadly defined AT states (also referred to as specific game states). In this embodiment, a net increase number counter is provided for counting the number of medals acquired in the CZ state and AT state. In the process of updating the net increase number counter (counting timing will be described later), in the game, if (1) the number of payouts > the number of insertions, the additional value = the number of payouts - the number of insertions, and the addition value is added to the value of the net increase number counter. On the other hand, if (2) the number of coins to be paid out≦the number of coins to be put in, then subtraction value=the number of coins to be put in−the number of coins to be paid out, and the subtraction value is subtracted from the value of the net increase counter.

Although the net increase number counter of the present embodiment is provided in the main control unit 300, it is not limited to this. It may be provided in the first sub-controller 400 . Also, it may be provided in both the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and both may count.

Note that the net increase number counter may not fall below 0, or may fall below 0. In the former case, even if the number of acquired medals becomes negative, it is maintained at 0, and when the payout is performed, the amount of the payout is added, and the added value is displayed in the number of acquired medals display d1 which will be described later. In the latter case, when the number of acquired medals becomes negative, the counter is updated to be negative, and even if the payout is performed, the acquired number display d1 may not be updated until the counter reaches 0 (even if the counter is negative, the number of acquired medals is displayed). d1 is fixed and displayed at 0).

Further, in this embodiment, a MY counter for counting the number of medals won in an advantageous section is provided separately from the net increase number counter. In the updating process of the MY counter (counting timing will be described later), if (1) the number of coins paid out > the number of coins inserted in the game, the additional value = the number of coins paid out - the number of coins inserted, and the added value is added to the value of the MY counter. (2) If the number of coins to be paid out≦the number of coins to be put in, subtraction value=the number of coins to be put in−the number of coins to be paid out, and the subtraction value is subtracted from the value of the MY counter. As a result of updating, if the value of the MY counter is <0, the value of the MY counter is set to 0. That is, the value of the MY counter never becomes negative.

The MY counter of the present embodiment is provided in main control unit 300, but is not limited to this. It may be provided in the first sub-controller 400 .

In other words, the number of earned medals can be said to be the game value given to the player, and in a broader sense, it may be the number of game media other than medals, the number of game values stored electronically, and the like. .

FIG. 61 shows subdivided states of the above-described three game states and the AT state, and these transition conditions are indicated on arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, the game state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

FIG. 61 shows that when the CZ lottery is won in the normal state, which is the initial state, the state is shifted to the CZ state, and when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, which is the initial state, the state is shifted to the AT state. It is In the normal state, the CZ lottery and the AT lottery are carried out according to the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. When winning the CZ lottery, the state shifts to the CZ state, and when winning the AT lottery, the state shifts to the specialized state of the AT state. It should be noted that, when an AT win is made, a freeze occurs, and the player can grasp the transition to the AT state by the occurrence of this freeze.

The CZ state is a game state in which 20 games are continued. In the CZ state, the point lottery corresponding to the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process is executed in the 1st to 15th games. The total value (up to 100 Pt) of the points (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Pt) acquired from the first game to the fifteenth game corresponds to the AT winning probability. For example, when the total value of points acquired from the 1st game to the 15th game is 60 points, the probability of shifting to the AT state is 60%. Whether or not to shift to the AT state is based on the lottery result based on the Pt value. More specifically, as a result of the continuous effect executed from the 16th game to the 20th game, it is notified whether or not the game will shift to the AT state in the 20th game, which is the final game.

FIG. 61 shows that when the AT lottery is won in the CZ state, the state shifts to the AT state, and when the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the normal state. When the CZ state is changed to the AT state, the state is changed to the AT normal state of the AT state.

The AT state consists of 40 games per set. In the AT normal state, a stock lottery, a pseudo-bonus lottery, and a specialized state lottery are executed according to the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. In addition, in the AT normal state, when Blue 7 Replay wins, stock lottery, pseudo-bonus lottery, and specialized state lottery are executed. In the lottery when the blue 7 replay wins, the greater the number of Seven 1 symbols displayed on the active line, the more advantageous benefits and privileges are given to the player. When the player wins the stock lottery, AT games of the number of winning sets (40 games×n: n is a natural number) are provided.

In the AT normal state, when the pseudo bonus lottery is won, the game shifts to the pseudo BB state. In the pseudo BB state, winning the pushing order pattern BAR replay or pushing order pattern peach 7 replay, the replay role 12 (BAR replay) which is a pseudo regular bonus (pseudo RB), or the replay which is a pseudo big bonus (pseudo BB) When the game combination 17 or 18 (peach 7 replay) is won, a pseudo BB game or a pseudo RB game is started. The pseudo BB game is more advantageous to the player than the pseudo RB game. For example, in the pseudo BB game, the number of operation navigations is larger than in the pseudo RB game, and in the pseudo BB game, the number of games and the number of medals to be paid out are larger than those of the pseudo RB game, which are the ending conditions. In the pseudo BB state, when the termination condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to the AT normal state.

In the AT normal state, if the special state lottery is won, the state is shifted to the special state. In the specialized state, the probability of winning the stock lottery and the number of stocks to be given are increased compared to the AT normal state. In the specialized state, when the termination condition is met, the state is shifted to the AT normal state.

Also, in the AT normal state, pseudo BB state, or special state, when the value of the MY counter reaches 2000 or more, the state shifts to the ending state, and in the ending state, when the value of the MY counter reaches 2400 or more, the AT state ends. , to the normal state.

FIG. 61 shows that in the AT state, when the stock number becomes 0 or when the ending state ends, the normal state is entered. When the AT state shifts to the normal state, the state shifts to the normal state of the non-advantageous section, so the net increase number counter and the MY counter are reset. When the CZ state shifts to the normal state, the shift is made to the normal state of the advantageous section, so the MY counter is not reset, but the net increase number counter is reset.

<Operation Navi>
Operation navigation can be executed in the CZ state and the AT state. Operation navigation is a notification effect that notifies the stop operation mode (information about the content of the stop operation), and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player. there is Operation navigation can be broadly classified into (1) push order navigation that reports information including the operation order (push order) of the stop operation, and (2) information that includes operation timing (for example, a pattern of the stop target, etc.). There is a pattern navigator to notify. In the case of this embodiment, the symbol navigator includes a symbol navigator showing Seven 1 symbols, a symbol navigator showing Seven 2 symbols, and a symbol navigator showing BAR symbols. In other words, the pressing order navigation is operation navigation that does not include the timing of eye pressing, and the pattern navigation is operation navigation that includes the timing of eye pressing.

Specifically, the push-order navigation of this embodiment includes (1) push-order navigation for notifying the operation order of the correct answer to win a small win 6 (bell) when winning the push-order bell, and (2) If you win internally in the push order pattern blue 7 replay, you will win a BAR replay if you win internally in the push order pattern BAR replay. (4) Push-order navigation for notifying the correct operation order for winning the Momo 7 replay when internally winning the Push-order pattern Momo 7 replay, (5) There is push-order navigation (fake push-order navigation) for informing the operation order when replay hands 1 and 2 are internally won.

Further, as the symbol navigator of the present embodiment, specifically, (1) a symbol for notifying a symbol (Seven 1 symbol) for winning a blue 7 replay when internally winning the push order symbol blue 7 replay; Navigation (hereinafter referred to as blue 7 pattern navigation), (2) Symbol navigation (hereinafter referred to as BAR pattern navigation) that notifies the symbol (BAR design) for winning the BAR replay when internally winning the push order symbol BAR replay , (3) Symbol navigation (hereinafter referred to as Momo 7 symbol navigation) for informing the symbol (Seven 2 symbol) for winning the Momo 7 replay when internally winning the push order symbol Momo 7 replay, (4) Replay There is a pattern navigator (hereinafter referred to as fake pattern navigator, and fake push order navigator and fake pattern navigator are collectively referred to as fake navigator) that informs the seven 1 pattern when internally elected for roles 1 and 2. The symbol navigation is performed together with the execution of the push order navigation described above.

In addition, the above-described symbol navigation, that is, blue 7 symbol navigation, BAR symbol navigation, peach 7 symbol navigation and fake symbol navigation are not necessarily executed when the corresponding condition device number is won. For example, even if an internal win is made in the push-order map blue 7 pattern replay, the blue 7 pattern navigation may not be executed.

Details will be described later, but with regard to blue 7 symbol navigation, there is a blue 7 symbol navigation low probability state in which the probability of executing blue 7 symbol navigation is low, and a blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state in which the probability of executing blue 7 symbol navigation is high. and exist. In the case of the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state, a first band display effect (details will be described later) for notifying that the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state is executed.

In addition, with regard to BAR symbol navigation and peach 7 symbol navigation (hereinafter collectively referred to as pseudo bonus symbol navigation), a pseudo bonus symbol navigation low probability state in which the probability of executing pseudo bonus symbol navigation is low, and a pseudo bonus symbol navigation low probability state. There is a pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state with a high probability of execution, and in the case of the pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state, a second band display effect informing that the pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state is present executed. Therefore, when the second band display effect is executed, it becomes easier to win a pseudo bonus (pseudo BB, pseudo RB). The pseudo BB state described above is also a pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state.

Here, the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state continues for at least the number of guaranteed games, and after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed, a drop lottery is performed with a predetermined probability, and when the drop lottery is won, the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state continues. ends. The same applies to the pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state.

Instead of the pseudo-bonus symbol navigation high-probability state, a pseudo-bonus lottery high-probability state in which the probability of winning a pseudo-bonus (lottery probability) is high may be provided. The pseudo-bonus lottery high-probability state continues for at least the guaranteed number of games, and after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed, a fall lottery is performed with a predetermined probability, and ends when the fall lottery is won. The transition to this pseudo bonus lottery high probability state is determined by a high probability transition lottery in a state that is not in the pseudo bonus lottery high probability state (hereinafter also referred to as a non-high probability state). This high-probability transition lottery may be performed according to the winning combination, or may be performed by continuous winning of bell or continuous winning of replay.

In addition, a pseudo bonus lottery in a non-high probability state may also be performed according to the winning combination. may be performed. The probability of winning the pseudo bonus in the pseudo bonus lottery in the non-high probability state may be determined for each winning combination. For example, a watermelon wins with the first probability, a cherry wins with a second probability, and a blue 7 replay in which one blue 7 is stopped has a third probability of winning. , In the case of a push-order pattern blue 7 replay in which two blue 7s are stopped, you win with the fourth probability, and in the case of a push-order pattern blue 7 replay in which three blue 7s are stopped, you win with the fifth probability , "first<second<third<fourth<fifth".

Also, the pseudo bonus lottery in the pseudo bonus lottery high probability state may be performed according to the winning combination, and the probability of winning the pseudo bonus may be determined for each winning combination. For example, a watermelon wins with a 6th probability higher than the 1st probability, a cherry wins with a 7th probability higher than the 2nd probability, and blue 7 is stopped by one. In the case of the pattern blue 7 replay, the winning probability is 8th higher than the 3rd probability, and the pushing order in which two blue 7s are stopped.In the case of the pattern blue 7 replay, the 9th probability is higher than the 4th probability. In the case of a push order pattern blue 7 replay in which three blue 7 are stopped, the tenth probability is higher than the fifth probability, and "sixth < seventh < eighth < ninth < The probability of winning may be higher in the order of "10th".

If a pseudo bonus is won in the pseudo bonus lottery, the type of BB or RB is determined, the pseudo bonus preparation state is entered, and the preparation state continues until the condition device corresponding to BB or RB is determined. When the corresponding conditional device is won, a pattern navigator aiming at a BB pattern or an RB pattern is generated, and then a pseudo-bonus is started. Further, a lottery for promotion from RB to BB may be conducted according to the winning combination in the preparation state.

Incidentally, the fake navigation is operation navigation executed when the replay combination 1, 2 is internally won. This fake navigation is an operation navigation that is notified in the same production mode as the push order navigation and pattern navigation that are executed when the push order pattern blue 7 replay is internally won, but the stop operation is performed according to the content of the notification. Even if it is, it only wins the replay role 1 or the replay role 2, and does not win the blue 7 replay. Fake navigation is fake operation navigation for improving the player's sense of expectation. Incidentally, the fake navigation is executed when the fake navigation lottery for determining whether or not to execute the fake navigation is won in the game in which the replay hands 1 and 2 are internally won. 112 is carried out for reels determined by a reel lottery that determines whether to perform symbol navigation. In addition, by providing a notification mode of symbol navigation that may be fake navigation and a notification mode of symbol navigation that may not be fake navigation, it is possible to produce a sense of expectation when symbol navigation occurs. For example, by adding a red effect to the blue 7 symbol navigator, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the Seven 1 symbol will be stopped by operating the Seven 1 symbol at the appropriate timing, and the possibility that it is a fake navigator is low. By adding a blue effect to the blue 7 pattern navigation, even if the Seven 1 pattern is operated at the appropriate timing, it is less likely that the Seven 1 pattern will stop than with the red effect, suggesting that it is likely to be a fake navigation. By doing so, the degree of expectation that the seven-one pattern will be stopped is higher for the red effect, and the degree of expectation that the seven-one pattern will be stopped can be made lower for the blue effect than for the red effect.

<Operation of the slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initialization is performed. Set values, etc.

In step S102, medal insertion/start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and if there is an insertion operation lights up the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control section 400 . When the player wins the replay role in the previous game, the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so the player does not need to insert medals.

In addition, it checks whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been made, the number of inserted medals is determined, and the first sub-control section 400 In response, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid pay line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for a winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process for the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state (RT type game state), and the internal lottery is performed using this table and the random number obtained in step S104. I do. As a result of the internal lottery, when any internal winning combination is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internal winning combination is activated (the flag of the internal winning combination turns ON). Also, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal winning combination lottery to the first sub-control section 400. FIG. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon is internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal winning combination lottery is lost (the winning combination is In the case of non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing for starting rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, it is possible to accept the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is changed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. One of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames to be drawn set in the stop data. If all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (more specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation, and the for the stop button reception 2 command, and for the third stop operation, prepare to transmit the stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel (Specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop command for the third stop operation 3 command) to the first sub-controller 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, the winning of the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning. judged to have won the role. For example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon wins. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if the player wins some winning combination with payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

In step S111, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control section 400. FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. Various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 63) of the main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically turned on so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, a restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S<b>206 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-controller 400 . In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the effect control contents.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of an error related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low-voltage signal is off (power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for ending the timer interrupt ending process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 62 is returned to.

<Processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64(a) is a flow chart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 64(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 64(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, the main processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 64(a).

When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the performance data read out in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to set the command to be transmitted to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 64(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S401 of command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 64(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 64(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, the random number value for effect is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-controller>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 65(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 65(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 65(d) is a flow chart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 65(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, initialization processing of storage areas in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 65(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment). period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 65(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing in step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 65(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal has been input. wait for

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 obtains image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, etc.) forming the display image. , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516 . The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image rendering. wait for is entered.

In step S906, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Display of acquired number in CZ state and AT state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the obtained number display in the CZ state and the AT state will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the transition of effect images displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the case of shifting to the AT state or normal state after 20 games in the CZ state. In this embodiment, the obtained number display d1 is not performed in the CZ state, but the obtained number display d1 is performed in the AT state (the reason will be described later). Here, the obtained number display d1 displays the value of the net increase number counter. The net increase number counter is configured to count the net increase number in the CZ state and the AT state, as described above.

As shown in FIG. 66, from the 1st game to the 15th game in the CZ state, Pt is added according to the progress of the game (result of internal winning combination lottery processing). For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 66, a value of 40 points is displayed for the 5th game, 60 points for the 10th game, and 5 points for the 15th game. Therefore, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 66, the probability of shifting to the AT state is 75%. Next, from the 16th game to the 20th game in the CZ state, continuous effects are executed over 5 games. The continuous effect is, specifically, a effect indicating whether or not to shift to the AT state. In the CZ state, as shown in FIG. 66, the win number display d1 is not displayed.

When the result of the continuous effect in the 20th game in the CZ state is "win", the AT state is started from the next game, the AT state effect is started, and the acquired number display d1 is displayed. The AT1 game shown in FIG. 66 shows the case where the value of the acquired number display d1 is 50. FIG. In other words, in this case, the number obtained in the CZ state was 50. When the number of won coins in the CZ state becomes less than 0, the value of the obtained number display d1 may be set to 0 as well as the effect of the AT state is started.

On the other hand, when the result of the continuous effect in the 20th game in the CZ state is "defeat", the normal state is started from the next game, and the normal state effect is started. Note that when the CZ state is shifted to the normal state, the net increase number counter is reset to zero. Even if this net increase counter is reset, if the advantageous section continues, the MY counter continues counting without being reset. A counter is also reset.

In the CZ state and the AT state, as shown in FIG. 66, operation navigation (push order navigation, pattern navigation) may be executed. CZ 1st game and AT 1st game show the case where push order navigation is executed and image d2 of push order navigation is displayed, and in CZ 10th game, pushing order symbol blue 7 replay is internally won and pushing order is shown. This shows a case where both navigation and symbol navigation are executed, and an image d2 of push order navigation and an image d3 of symbol navigation are displayed.

In the CZ state of this embodiment, Pt is added to the 1st to 15th games. The reflected Pt may also be added.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of net increases in the CZ state and the AT state is displayed in the form of the acquired number display d1 in the AT state, but the information displayed in the AT state is not limited to the acquired number. For example, the number of push-order navigations to be executed when the push-order bell is internally won, and the number of stocks of ATs to be added may be displayed.

Also, in the present embodiment, the condition for ending the CZ state is the completion of 20 games, but it may be other than the game period. For example, the termination condition of the CZ state may be the case where the number of times of push order navigation executed when the push order bell is internally won reaches a predetermined number of times.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 66, the CZ state is a game state in which the transition to the AT state is not confirmed from the beginning, and is continued for a predetermined period (20 games in this embodiment) and operation navigation is also executed. Therefore, it can be said that this is a gaming state in which a certain amount of profit can be brought to the player although it is less than in the AT state. Since the CZ state is such an unstable game state, if the player does not shift to the AT state, the player will feel bad about it.

In the CZ state, the winning number display d1 is not displayed, but in the CZ state, an external signal (a signal that can specify the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals) related to the increase or decrease of medals is output. administrator) can grasp the increase or decrease of medals in the CZ state. An external signal relating to increase or decrease of medals is output even in the AT state, and is output even in the normal state. Further, in the present embodiment, operation navigation is executed in the CZ state, but the net increase number may be counted without executing operation navigation in the CZ state.

<Operation navigation when winning the push order pattern blue 7 replay>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70, operation navigation in the case of internal winning in the pressing order symbol blue 7 replay in the AT state will be described. The push order navigation of this embodiment is started based on the start operation (start lever operation), but the symbol navigation of this embodiment has a plurality of execution start points as shown in FIGS. 67 to 70. . In the following description, the image d2 indicating the stop operation order of "right-center-left" of the push-order navigation is simply referred to as image d2, and the image d3 indicating "Seven 1 symbol" for the left reel 110 of the symbol navigation is referred to as image d3. , is simply abbreviated as image d3.

FIG. 67 shows a case where condition device number 7 is won, and push order navigation and symbol navigation are executed based on the start operation. That is, it shows the case where the execution of the symbol navigation is started along with the start operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 67, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation (time point A1), and produces an image d2 of push order navigation and an image d3 of symbol navigation from the time point A1 of the start operation. It is displayed on the image display device 157 . As a result, the player can be notified that the Seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110 is the symbol to be stopped with respect to the "right-center-left" stop operation and the third stop operation. Note that operations on the stop buttons 137-139 can be accepted as soon as the reels 110-112 start rotating.

When the player's stop operation is performed and the blue 7 replay (replay combination 8) wins, the slot machine 100 performs a stock lottery, a pseudo-bonus lottery, or a special state lottery, which gives the player a chance. A telop d4 indicating that is displayed. Further, when the blue 7 replay wins, the effect d5 may be generated for the stopped seven 1 symbol.

As described above, according to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 67, since the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started based on the start operation, it is possible to give a time margin for the third stop operation, and to prevent an erroneous operation. can be prevented.

FIG. 68 shows a case where condition device number 7 is won, execution of push order navigation is started based on the start operation (start lever operation), and symbol navigation is executed based on the start of reel rotation. . That is, it shows the case where the execution of the symbol navigation is started after the start operation and before the first stop operation. Note that the images on the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation are the same as those in FIG. 67, so the example images after the first stop operation are omitted in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 68, the slot machine 100 generates a wait based on the start operation (time point B1), and starts spinning the reels 110 to 112 at time B2 after the wait time has elapsed. Further, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the image d2 of the push order navigation from the time B1 of the start operation, and starts displaying the image d3 of the symbol navigation on the effect image display device 157 from the time B2 of the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112. . Operations on the stop buttons 137-139 can be accepted from time B2 when the reels 110-112 start rotating.

In this way, according to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 68, the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started after the wait generated based on the start operation, so it is possible to give time margin for the third stop operation. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation. In addition, it is possible to give time allowance to the operation of the pressing order, and to prevent erroneous operation.

FIG. 69 shows a case where the condition device number 7 is won, and execution of push order navigation is started based on the start operation (start lever operation), and symbol navigation is executed based on the first stop operation. there is That is, after the start operation, the symbol navigation is started based on the first stop operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation (time point C1), and starts displaying the push order navigation image d2 from the time point C1 of the start operation. Next, when the player performs the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the symbol navigation image d3 on the effect image display device 157 from the time point C2 of the first stop operation. Operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted from time C1 when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating.

As described above, according to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 69, since the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started based on the first stop operation, it is possible to give time margin for the third stop operation. , erroneous operation can be prevented.

FIG. 70 shows a case where condition device number 7 is won, execution of push order navigation is started based on the start operation (start lever operation), and symbol navigation is executed during freeze generated based on the second stop operation. indicates when In other words, after the second stop operation, freezing is generated and execution of symbol navigation for the third stop operation is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 70, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation (time point D1), and starts displaying the push order navigation image d2 from the time point D1 of the start operation. Next, when the player performs the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the slot machine 100 freezes based on the time D3 of the second stop operation, and displays the symbol navigation image at time D4 during the freeze. d3 is started to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 . Since the third stop operation cannot be performed during this freeze occurrence period, the player can be made to pay attention to the image d3 of the symbol navigation. After that, the slot machine 100 displays the symbol navigation image d3 until the player performs the third stop operation after the freeze is released.

Operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted from time C1 when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, but after the freeze occurs, operations on the stop button 137 can be accepted from time D4 when the freeze is released. It has become.

Thus, according to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 70, since the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started while the freeze is occurring after the second stop operation, although it is after the most recent second stop operation, A margin of time can be given for the third stop operation, and an erroneous operation can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 70, the symbol navigation is started from time D4 during freezing, but may be started from time D3 when freezing starts. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the case of symbol navigation for the third stop reel has been described, but the freeze can also be applied to the first stop reel and the second stop reel. In this case, (1) when executing symbol navigation for the first stop reel, freeze is generated based on the most recent start operation, execution of symbol navigation is started during the freeze, and (2) for the second stop reel. When executing symbol navigation, a freeze is generated based on the first stop operation, which is the most recent stop operation, and execution of symbol navigation is started during the freeze.

Thus, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, during execution of the push order navigation which is the operation condition for the stop buttons 137 to 139, the effect of adding the pattern navigation which is the new operation condition is performed. By executing this, it is possible to provide a game that gives unexpectedness when only the push order navigation occurs.

<Band display effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the band display effect will be described. 71A and 71B are diagrams showing the effect mode of the band display effect, and FIG. 71A shows the effect mode of the band display effect when the left reel 110 is rotating and the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 are stopped. FIG. 71(b) shows an effect mode of the band display effect when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. FIG. 71 shows an example of a strip display effect in a game in which the pressing order symbol blue 7 replay is internally won in the AT state and the blue 7 symbol navigation is executed.

The band display effect is an effect in which predetermined information is displayed in a band-shaped area formed on the effect image display device 157 and the displayed predetermined information is scrolled. The strip display effect of the present embodiment includes a first strip display effect for notifying that the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state and a second strip display effect for notifying that the pseudo bonus symbol symbol navigation high probability state. And there is. FIG. 71 shows an effect mode of the band display effect when both the first band display effect and the second band display effect are being executed at the same time. Of course, there are cases where only one of the first band display effect and the second band display effect is executed.

The first band display effect is a blue translucent band area formed vertically on the left end of the screen of the effect image display device 157. Information indicating that the symbol navigation high probability state is displayed (for example, with the Seven 1 symbol) This is an effect in which an effect image d10 including d11, such as a character indicating an increase in appearance rate, is displayed, and the information d11 is scrolled upward from the bottom of the screen. The effect image d10 is a effect image in which a plurality of pieces of the same information d11 are arranged on a strip area with an interval S1 therebetween. Here, at the start of display of the first band display effect, at least one piece of information d11 in the effect image d10 is displayed so that the entire information is visible without being blocked (for example, FIG. 71(a) ) displayed above the effect image d10).

The second band display effect is a semi-transparent red band area formed diagonally from the upper right end of the screen of the effect image display device 157 to the lower left end of the screen. This is an effect in which an effect image d20 including information (for example, characters such as "high probability of bonus") d21 is displayed, and the information d21 is scrolled from the upper right to the lower left of the screen. The effect image d20 is a effect image in which a plurality of pieces of the same information d21 are arranged on a band area with a predetermined interval S2 therebetween. Here, at the start of display of the second band display effect, at least one piece of information d21 in the effect image d20 is displayed so that the entire information is visible without being shielded (for example, FIG. 71(a) ) displayed above the effect image d20).

When at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating, the effect image d20 is displayed behind the reel window 113 in the overlap region R1 between the effect image d20 and the reel window 113, as shown in FIG. 71(a). be. As a result, the reel window 113 is not blocked by the effect image d20, and the entire reels 110 to 112 are visible. On the other hand, the effect image d20 is displayed in front of the reel window 113 in the overlapping area R1 with the reel window 113 when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, as shown in FIG. 71(b). As a result, the entire effect image d20 becomes visible.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first band display effect and the second band display effect are executed at the same time, as shown in FIGS. In the band display effect overlap region R2, the effect image d20 is displayed in front of the effect image d10. This is because, while the reels 110 to 11 are rotating, the information d21 has many areas that are blocked by the reel window 113, so the information d21 is treated preferentially over the information d11, and more information than the first band display effect is played. This is to inform the person. Further, at the start of display of the second band display effect, at least one information d21 of the effect image d20 is configured to be displayed in a visually recognizable manner without the entire information being shielded. This is because there are many areas blocked by 113 . It is also possible to provide a period in which scrolling is not performed momentarily at the start of display of the second band display effect, and then scrolling is performed, thereby making it easier to grasp the information d21. However, the display method of the overlap region R2 is not limited to this, and the effect image d10 may be displayed in front of the effect image d20. In this case, the information d11 is displayed more preferentially than the information d21, so that the player's awareness of the Seven 1 symbol becomes higher.

In addition, since the first band display effect and the second band display effect of the present embodiment are translucent band images, the image displayed behind can be visually recognized. The second band display effect and the second band display effect may not be translucent band images, and the objects displayed behind may be invisible. Further, although the scroll speeds of the first band display effect and the second band display effect of the present embodiment are the same, they do not have to be the same.

Also, with respect to the first band display effect and the second band display effect, the fanning effect is executed respectively. The fanning effect is a effect suggesting the execution of the first band display effect or the second band display effect. This is an effect that repeatedly fades in and fades out the effect image d20 of the band area, and is an effect that makes it clear whether or not the band display effect is to be executed after the third stop operation.

As a result, it is possible to prompt the player whether or not to move to the high-probability state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game each time the stop operation is performed.

Further, when the first band display effect or the second band display effect ends, the effect image d10 or the effect image d20 disappears when the high probability state ends, but after the high probability state ends, the effect image d10 or d20 disappears. It may be hidden by a game start operation. Further, the fade-in/fade-out may be repeated for each stop operation in the game in which the high probability state ends, and finally the display may disappear after the third stop operation. Note that the fade-in/fade-out may be performed even when the high-probability state does not end, and in this case, the display is not finally hidden by the third stop operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the high-probability state. When both high-probability states end at the same time, both band display effects may be hidden at the same time. In addition, since there is a concern that the player's motivation will decrease if they are hidden at the same time, they may be hidden at different timings. In addition, when the band display is hidden suddenly, the player may not notice it or may be mistaken for some kind of malfunction, so when the band display is hidden, the band display becomes misty and gradually disappears (hidden and It may be accompanied by a non-display effect rendition such as The band display can be effectively hidden while resolving the above concerns.

Here, the width of each reel 110 to 12 is L1, the width of the image of the symbol navigation is L2, the width of the image of the push order navigation is L3, the width of the symbol of the effect image d10 is L4, and the width of the band of the effect image d10 is When N1 is the width of the band of the effect image d20 and N2 is the width of the band of the effect image d20, in the present embodiment, the relationships of (1) L1>L2>L3, (2) L2>L4, and (3) N1>N2 are established. 4) The relationship of the interval S1 of the information d11 in the effect image d10>the interval S2 of the information d21 in the effect image d20 is satisfied. According to the configuration (1), since the reel width is the widest, it is possible to concentrate on hitting the reels, and by making the width of the pattern navigation larger than the width of the push order navigation, it is easy to grasp the target pattern. effective. According to the configuration (2), it is possible to perform display according to the width of the scroll area. According to the configuration of (3), the effect image d10 includes character and pattern information, while the effect image d20 contains only character information. Become. According to the configuration of (4), the effect image d10 includes character and pattern information, and the information d21 may be blocked by the reels 110 to 112 while the reels are rotating. By doing so, the design of the effect image d10 becomes easier to see, and the exposure of the information d21 can be increased.

However, the size relationship of each object mentioned above is not limited to this. For example, the relationships of (5) L1<L2, (6) L2<L3, (7) L2<L4, (8) N1<N2, and (9) S1<S2 may be established. For example, in the case of (5), the symbols to be highlighted can be highlighted, and the reels to be stopped can be highlighted. In the case of (6), the push order navigation can be emphasized, and an error in the operation stop order can be prevented. In the case of (7), the effect image d10 can be emphasized, and the awareness of the Seven 1 symbol can be further enhanced. In the case of (8), the presence of the effect image d20 can be emphasized, and the awareness of the advantageous game state can be enhanced. In the case of (9), the information d11 of the effect image d10 can be emphasized.

The display position, scrolling direction, and overlapping area display method of the band display effect are not limited to the example of the band display effect shown in FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 72, the second band display effect displays the effect image d20 in a translucent red band area formed in the horizontal direction above the screen of the effect image display device 157, and displays the information d21. An effect of scrolling the screen from the right to the left may be provided. In this case, since the effect image d20 does not overlap the reel window 113, the information d21 can be easily viewed. Further, as shown in FIG. 72, in the overlapping region R2 of the effect image d10 and the effect image d20, the effect image d10 is displayed in front and the effect image d20 is displayed in the background so that the information d11 is treated more preferentially than the information d12. may In this case, the information d11, especially the Seven 1 pattern, is more conspicuous, so that the player's awareness of the Seven 1 pattern can be further enhanced.

Further, in FIG. 72, the effect image d20 may be displayed below the reel window 113, or the effect image d20 may be displayed in the area where the operation navigation is displayed. In the latter case, when the second band display effect and the operation navigation are executed at the same time, the image d2 of the push order navigation and the image d3 of the pattern navigation may be displayed in front of the information d21.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. The effect image d20 may be displayed in the band area, and the scroll direction of the first band display effect and the second band display effect may be the same. In this case, the effect image d10 and the effect image d20 do not overlap the reel window 113, and the information d11 and the information d21 are scrolled from the bottom to the top of the screen. Both the effect image d10 and the effect image d20 do not overlap with the reel window 113, so both the information d11 and the information d21 are easily visible. Incidentally, when only one of the first band display effect and the second band display effect is executed, the effect image d10 or the effect image d20 may be displayed on both the left and right sides. Then, when both the first band display effect and the second band display effect are executed, the display is performed as shown in FIG. 73, or the overlapping region R2 is provided and displayed as shown in FIG. may

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the information d11 and the information d21 are displayed in the semi-transparent blue band area and the semi-transparent red band area, respectively. No need. That is, only information d11 and information d21 may be scroll-displayed without forming a translucent area. In this case as well, since the band is formed by the character string (information string), it corresponds to the band display effect in this case.

<Counting the display of the number of acquisitions in the AT state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a counting method for displaying the number of cards obtained in the AT state will be described. FIG. 74(a) is a diagram for explaining how to count the obtained number display d1 in a state other than the ending state of the AT state (hereinafter referred to as a non-ending state), and FIG. 74(b) is an ending state of the AT state. is a diagram for explaining a counting method of the acquired number display d1A.

In this embodiment, in the non-ending state, the obtained number counted using the net increase number counter is displayed, while in the ending state, the net increase number counted using the MY counter is displayed. Therefore, when the non-ending state shifts to the ending state, the net increase number display using the net increase number counter is switched to the net increase number display using the MY counter. Of course, since the counter to be referred to changes, the numerical value displayed on the obtained number display d1 may also change. The reason why the counters referred to in the non-ending state and the ending state are different is that the ending state gives the player a sense of accomplishment that he or she has obtained 2400, which is the upper limit of the number of obtained cards in the advantageous section. In the ending state, if the number of acquired cards is displayed using the net increase counter, the ending state may end when the number of acquired cards is less than the upper limit of 2400 (for example, within the same advantageous section In this case, the player may be left with a bad impression. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to eliminate such a problem, the ending state is changed to MY I decided to use a counter. In the ending state, the MY counter is used to display the number of acquired cards, but the update of the net increase counter continues internally. However, the update of the net increase number counter may be terminated internally.

First, with reference to FIG. 74(a), a method of counting the obtained number display d1 in the non-ending state will be described. The winning number display d1 in the non-ending state is based on the count of the net increase number counter that starts when the CZ state is started.

The slot machine 100 pays out 8 medals since a small combination of 6 (Bell) was won in the N-th game. As a result, in the acquired number display d1, 70 coins are displayed by adding the 8 coins paid out.

Next, based on the player's betting operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts spinning the reels 110 to 112 of the N+1 game. As a result, 67 medals are displayed in the acquired number display d1 by subtracting the three inserted medals. Next, since the small win 6 (bell) was won based on the player's stop operation in the N+1 game, the slot machine 100 pays out eight medals. As a result, the acquired number display d1 displays 75 coins by adding the 8 coins paid out.

Next, based on the player's betting operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts spinning the reels 110 to 112 of the N+2 game. As a result, 72 medals are displayed in the acquired number display d1 by subtracting the three inserted medals.

In this way, in the non-ending state, the acquired number display d1 is updated two times when the number of medals increases or decreases in one game. Specifically, the winning number display d1 is added and updated at the timing when the medals are paid out (more precisely, at the timing when the third stop reel is stopped and the winning is determined), and at the timing when the medals are bet (exactly is subtracted and updated at the timing of the start operation when the bet is confirmed. It should be noted that if the medals are not paid out, the acquired number display d1 is not updated.

Next, referring to FIG. 74(b), a method of counting the obtained number display d1 in the ending state will be described. The winning number display d1A in the ending state is based on the count of the MY counter that starts when the advantageous section starts. When the non-ending state changes to the ending state, the net increase number display using the net increase number counter is switched to the net increase number display using the MY counter.

The slot machine 100 pays out 8 medals since a small winning combination of 6 (Bell) was won in the M-th game. However, the acquired number display d1A in the ending state displays 2105 cards, which is 2100 cards plus 5 cards (the reason will be described later).

Next, based on the player's betting operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts spinning the reels 110 to 112 of the M+1 game. In the M+1-th game, the acquired number display d1A is not updated based on the betting operation and the start operation, and the acquired number display d1A remains at 2105.

Next, when the player wins a small win 6 (bell) based on the player's stop operation in the M+1 game, the slot machine 100 pays out eight medals. As a result, in the winning number display d1A, 2110 medals are displayed by subtracting the 3 medals inserted in the M+1 game and adding the 8 medals paid out, that is, adding the total of 5 medals (described above). The same is true for the M game). Subsequently, based on the player's betting operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 of the M+2 game. In the M+2 game, the acquired number display d1A is not updated based on the betting operation and the start operation, and the acquired number display d1A remains at 2110.

On the other hand, if it is a loss based on the player's stop operation in the M+1 game,
The slot machine 100 does not pay out medals. As a result, 2102 medals are displayed in the display of the number of won medals d1A by subtracting the three medals inserted in the M+2 game.

Thus, in the ending state, the obtained number display d1 is updated once in one game. Specifically, the winning number display d1A shows the number of medals inserted in the game and the number of medals inserted in the game at the timing when the medals are paid out (more precisely, the timing when the third stop reel is stopped and the winning is determined). In consideration of the number of medals paid out in , addition and subtraction are performed and updated. In the ending state, since the end of the AT state is approaching, the update when the medals are inserted, which ensures the subtraction update, should not be performed, so as not to give the impression that the medals are decreasing in the ending state as much as possible. ing.

In the non-ending state, the increased amount of the game value in one AT state is displayed, while in the ending state, the increased amount of the game value in one advantageous section is displayed, so that the player can obtain up to the upper limit of the obtained number of sheets in the advantageous section. It is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment that he or she has completed the task. It should be noted that the ending state and the non-ending state of the present embodiment are displayed in this way, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display method may be adopted in which the display of the number of won medals is updated at one timing in one game in consideration of the number of medals inserted in and the number of medals paid out in the game. For example, it can be used during a bonus (during a pseudo bonus), during a specialized zone, or in a state where the transition to the ending state is confirmed.

<Operation promotion effect and operation response effect>
Next, the operation prompting effect and the operation response effect of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75 . FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when executing the operation prompting effect and the operation response effect of the present embodiment.

The operation prompting effect (also referred to as an operation request in the drawing) is a effect that prompts the user to operate the PUSH button 192 . Specifically, the operation prompting effect is a effect of displaying an effect image d31 prompting the operation of the PUSH button 192 after the third stop operation on the effect image display device 157 and lighting the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 . Lighting of the PUSH button 192 indicates that an operation to the PUSH button 192 can be accepted, and lighting of the BET button 132 indicates that an operation to the BET button 132 can be accepted.

The operation response effect is an effect executed in response to the operation when the PUSH button 192 or the bet button 132 is operated in response to the execution of the operation prompting effect. That is, the operation response effect is an effect that is executed not only when the PUSH button 192 related to performance execution is operated, but also when the BET button 132 related to game progress is operated, the operation being prompted by the operation promotion effect.

Specifically, the operation response effects are a first operation response effect executed based on the first operation on the PUSH button 192 and a second operation response effect executed on the basis of the second operation on the PUSH button 192 or the bet button 132. and two operation response effects. As described above, in the present embodiment, the PUSH button 192 can be operated twice, and the operation prompting effect includes the first operation prompting effect prompting the user to operate the PUSH button 192 for the first time and the PUSH button 192 for the second time. There is a second operation prompting effect for prompting an operation on 192 .

Here, the first operation response effect is the effect of displaying the effect image d32 indicating winning or non-winning of the award on the effect image display device 157, and the second operation response effect is the type of privilege to be granted. This is an effect in which an effect image d33 indicating (contents of privilege) is displayed on the effect image display device 157. FIG. For example, in the case of the AT state, the privilege means any one of AT stock provision, transition to the pseudo BB state, and transition to the specialized state. Note that the type of privilege (contents of privilege) may indicate the number of these privileges to be granted (the number of stocks).

FIG. 75 shows a case where an operation promotion effect and an operation response effect are executed in an effect in which two characters (lord and samurai) face each other (FIGS. 75(a) to (e)). The slot machine 100 executes a first operation prompting effect (also referred to as an operation request 1 in the figure) after the third stop operation of a predetermined game (a game in which the condition for executing the operation prompting effect is satisfied). An effect image d31 (for example, an image of the PUSH button 192, etc.) prompting the operation of the PUSH button 192 is displayed, and both the PUSH button 192 and the BET button 132 are lit (FIG. 75(b)). The display of the effect image d31 allows the player to understand that the PUSH button 192 can be operated. Also, although there is no display prompting the operation of the bet button 132, since the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are illuminated, it can be understood that both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 can be operated.

When the player operates the PUSH button 192 for the first time in response to the first operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the first operation response effect and displays the effect image d32 ( Figure 75 (b), (c)). The effect image d32 is an image indicating whether or not a privilege is won, and more specifically, an image relating to the victory or defeat of a confrontation between two characters (lord, samurai) (for example, an image with words such as victory or defeat). is. A win means that a prize is awarded, and a defeat means that a prize is not awarded. FIG. 75 shows that Mr. Tono wins and wins the prize. In addition, when it is notified that the prize is awarded in the first operation response effect, the movable accessory 193 appears in front of the effect image display device 157, and retreats after a predetermined time has passed (Fig. 75(c)).

Next, the slot machine 100 that has executed the first operation response effect executes a second operation prompting effect (also referred to as an operation request 2 in the figure), and the effect image d31 ( For example, an image of the PUSH button 192, etc.) is displayed, and both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit (FIG. 75(d)). The display of the effect image d31 allows the player to understand that the PUSH button 192 can be operated. Also, although there is no display prompting the operation of the bet button 132, since the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are illuminated, it can be understood that both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 can be operated.

When the player operates the PUSH button 192 for the second time in response to the second operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response effect and displays the effect image d33 ( FIG. 75(e)). The effect image d33 is an image indicating the type of privilege to be granted (details of the privilege). Specifically, as shown in FIG. . The effect image d33 in FIG. 75(e) indicates that the AT1 set is given.

If the second operation response effect is executed before the movable accessory 193 retreats, part or all of the effect image d33 may become difficult to see due to the presence of the movable accessory 193. However, since the movable accessory 193 retreats after the predetermined time has passed, the effect image d33 becomes visible after that.

On the other hand, when the player operates the bet button 132 in response to the first operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response effect and displays the effect image d33 (FIG. 75(b), (e)). In other words, when the BET button 132 is operated instead of the PUSH button 192 that prompts the user to operate, the effect image d32 indicating whether or not the award is won is skipped, and the award type (privilege content) is skipped. ) is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the privilege type (privilege details) to be given without operating the PUSH button 192 .

Note that even when the player operates the bet button 132 in response to the second operation prompting effect, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response effect and displays the effect image d33 (FIG. 75(d), (e)).

Next, after the second operation response effect is executed and the effect image d33 is displayed, when the player performs a start operation on the start lever 135, the slot machine 100 executes the next game effect (FIG. 75). (e), (f)). An image d5 of star marks shown in FIG. 75(f) indicates stock in the AT state, and the number of star marks indicates the number of stocks. Also, FIGS. 75(e) and (f) show the case where the start operation is performed after the second operation response effect is executed, but when the start operation is performed on the start lever 135, All the effects being executed are canceled, and the effects of the next game are executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, (1) when a replay role is won and the operation promotion effect is not executed in the game in which the replay role is won, the bet button 132 is not lit, but (2) the replay role is won. However, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the game in which the replay role is won, the bet button 132 is lit up (the PUSH button 192 is also lit up) while the operation promotion effect is being executed. ). As a result, when the operation promotion effect is executed, the player can grasp that the bet button 132 can be operated even in the case of the game in which the player has won a replay role, so the player is asked to perform the start operation. The operation of the bet button 132 can be prompted instead of being made to do so.

In addition, if the power is cut off or restored after the first promotion effect, the first promotion effect may not be executed again, or the first operation response effect or the second operation response effect may not be executed. On the other hand, there are cases where the first promotion effect is executed again, or the first operation response effect or the second operation response effect is executed. Also, if the power is cut off or restored after the second promotion effect, the second promotion effect may not be executed again, or the second operation response effect may not be executed. There are cases where the promotion effect is executed again, or the second operation response effect is executed. Also, when power is cut off and then restored when the operation means is operated, the effect may not be executed, but the effect may be executed in the same manner as described above.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a modification of the operation prompting effect and the operation response effect. Modification 1 shown in FIG. 76(a) and Modification 2 shown in FIG. 76(b) both execute an operation prompting effect (also referred to as an operation request in the figure) prompting the operation of the PUSH button 192 up to three times. It is possible to In other words, the operation prompting effects of Modifications 1 and 2 are the first operation prompting effect prompting the first operation of the PUSH button 192 (also referred to as operation request 1 in the drawing) and the first operation response effect during execution. A second operation prompting effect (also referred to as operation request 2 in the drawing) prompting the second operation of the PUSH button 192, and a second operation prompting the PUSH button 192 during the execution of the second operation response effect. It has three operation promotion effects (also referred to as operation request 3 in the figure). Here, the first operation response effect is an effect in response to the first operation promotion effect, and is executed when the player operates the PUSH button 192. The second operation response effect is the second operation response effect. is an effect in response to the operation prompting effect, and is executed when the player operates the PUSH button 192, and the third operation response effect is an effect in response to the third operation prompting effect, and the player is an effect executed when the PUSH button 192 is operated. Further, in the modified examples 1 and 2, when the bet button 132 is operated during execution of the first operation promotion effect, the second operation promotion effect, or the third operation promotion effect, the third 's operation response effect is executed.

In addition, in the modified examples 1 and 2, the effect image for prompting the operation of the PUSH button 192 of the operation promotion effects (first operation promotion effect, second operation promotion effect, third operation promotion effect) is d31, first The effect image of the operation response effect is denoted as d32, the effect image of the second operation response effect as d33, and the effect image of the third operation response effect as d34. The effect image d34 is an image showing the final response of the operation response effect.

For example, in the case of modification 1, the image of the operation response effect is an icon image, and as shown in FIG. The effect image d34 is an image of three icons. That is, when the PUSH button 192 is operated each time for the operation prompting effect, the icons are increased one by one, and finally the effect image d34 with three icons is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(a2), when the bet button 132 is operated for the second operation prompting effect, an effect image d34 with three icons is displayed. When the bet button 132 is operated in this way, the effect image d34 showing the final response may be displayed immediately.

Further, for example, in the case of modification 2, the image of the operation response effect is an image indicating the number of additional games, and as shown in FIG. d33 is an image showing +20G, and effect image d34 is an image showing a total of +30G. That is, when the PUSH button 192 is operated each time for the operation prompting effect, the number of additional games given to each operation is displayed for the first operation and the second operation, and the number of games for the third operation is displayed. , the total number of additional games given to the first and second operations is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(b2), when the bet button 132 is operated for the second operation promotion effect, the effect image d34, that is, the total number of additional games is suddenly displayed. When the bet button 132 is operated in this manner, the effect image d34 showing the total value may be displayed immediately.

<Other game machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. Input is from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device with a function that can store the number of lent medals by an electronic method or a function that can store the number of medals won by an electronic method) , includes inputting digitized data, and payout of game media includes outputting digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

<Summary of embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
updating means (e.g., net increase number counter, main control unit 300) that executes update processing related to a predetermined event (e.g., net increase number, etc.);
display means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the first sub-controller 400, the second sub-controller 500) that displays the predetermined event;
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, the main control unit 300, game state control processing);
A game machine comprising
The game state includes a specific game state (eg, CZ state, AT state),
The AT gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (eg, CZ state) and a second specific gaming state (eg, AT state),
The display means does not display the predetermined event in the first specific game state, but displays the predetermined event in the second specific game state (for example, FIG. 66),
The updating means is means for executing the updating process in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state.
This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, since the predetermined event is not displayed in the first specific game state, the player's interest can be focused on the game in the first specific game state instead of the predetermined event. In addition, since the update processing regarding the predetermined event is performed in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the player does not feel a sense of loss regarding the predetermined event in the first specific game state. .

In the first basic configuration,
The display means, when displaying the predetermined event in the second specific game state, is a means for performing a display that reflects the update process of the first specific game state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A1.

According to the preferred configuration A1, in the second specific game state, a display relating to the predetermined event reflecting the updating process of the first specific game state is performed, so that it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

In a first basic configuration or preferred configuration A1,
Said second specific game state is a game state more advantageous than said first specific game state,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A1α.

In the first basic configuration, preferred configuration A1, or preferred configuration A1α,
Said game state control means, when a specific event is established in said first specific game state (for example, when winning an AT lottery), shifts from said first specific game state to said second specific game state , When the specific event is not established in the first specific game state (for example, when AT lottery is not won), from the first specific game state to the second specific game state is a non-transferable means of
This is referred to as preferred configuration A2.

According to the preferred configuration A2, it is possible to improve the game interest in the first specific game state.

In preferred configuration A2,
The first specific gaming state is a chance zone (for example, CZ state) that can acquire the right to transition to the second specific gaming state,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A3.

According to the preferred configuration A3, it is possible to improve the game interest in the first specific game state. In addition, by not displaying a predetermined event in the first specific game state, the player is not dissatisfied without giving a negative impression to the player even when the transition to the second specific game state is not made. can be prevented from occurring.

In the first basic configuration, preferred configuration A1, preferred configuration A1α, preferred configuration A2, or preferred configuration A3,
The first specific game state is a game state that continues for a predetermined period of time,
This is referred to as preferred configuration A4.

According to the preferred configuration A4, since the first specific game state continues for a predetermined period of time, a certain amount of profit can be given to the player.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
A game table on which a game can be played,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stopping the rotation of the reels,
When executing a predetermined effect indicating the operation condition of the stop button, it is possible to execute a specific effect that increases the operation condition,
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, when the predetermined effect indicating the operation condition of the stop button is being executed, the specific effect that increases the operation condition is executed, so that the player can be given unexpectedness.

In a second basic configuration,
Informing means (for example, effect image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing operation mode notification (for example, operation navigation) indicating the operation mode according to the winning combination,
The predetermined effect is the operation mode notification,
The operation mode notification includes a first operation mode notification (for example, pressing order navigation) that notifies a first operation mode (for example, the order of stop operations) that does not include the eye pressing timing, and a first operation mode notification that includes the eye pressing timing. a second operation mode notification (e.g., symbol navigator) that notifies two operation modes (e.g., symbols to be stopped);
The informing means is means capable of executing the second operation mode notification by changing the first operation mode to the second operation mode when the first operation mode notification is being performed. (for example, FIGS. 67-70),
The specific effect is a effect of changing the first operation mode to the second operation mode when the first operation mode notification is being performed.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B0.

According to the preferred configuration B0, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness by changing from navigation without eye pressing to navigation with eye pressing.

In preferred configuration B0,
The notification means executes the first operation mode notification for a predetermined reel (for example, a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel) among the plurality of reels, and performs a predetermined trigger ( For example, with means for changing the first operation mode notification to the second operation mode notification for the predetermined reel in accordance with the freeze generated based on the start lever operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation) be,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B1.

According to the preferred configuration B1, when the interval until the stop operation is short, it is possible to give time to press the eyes, and it is possible to prevent erroneous operations by changing the mode of navigation.

In preferred configuration B0 or preferred configuration B1,
When a specific pattern (for example, Seven 1 pattern) is stopped and displayed, it is more advantageous to the player than when the specific pattern is not stopped and displayed (for example, AT stock number, transition to pseudo BB, special , etc.) is high,
The second operation mode notification is a notification indicating the specific pattern,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B2.

It should be noted that "a specific pattern" means one pattern or a plurality of patterns, and "a specific pattern is stopped and displayed" includes a specific pattern combination.

According to the preferred configuration B2, when the specific symbols stop, there is a high possibility that the game will be advantageous to the player, so it is possible to increase interest in the performance of the second operation mode notification. .

In preferred configuration B2,
The second operation mode notification includes a second operation mode notification A (for example, blue 7 pattern navigation) and a second operation mode notification B (for example, fake navigation),
The second operation mode notification A is a ratio of stop display of the specific pattern to a ratio of non-stop display of the specific pattern when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the specific pattern can be stopped. is a higher operation mode notification,
In the second operation mode notification B, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the specific symbol can be stopped, the percentage of the specific symbol stopped and displayed is higher than in the second operation mode notification A. Low operating mode notification,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B3.

According to the preferred configuration B3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the second operation mode notification is performed.

In preferred configuration B0, preferred configuration B1, preferred configuration B2, or preferred configuration B3,
internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) for determining an internal winning combination based on lottery information;
In a state in which the notification means executes the second operation mode notification,
a low-probability state (for example, blue 7 symbol navigation low-probability state) in which the ratio of executing the second operation mode notification is the first ratio when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination;
A high probability state (for example, blue 7 symbol navigator high probability state) and
comprising
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B4.

According to the preferred configuration B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for being controlled to the high probability state.

In preferred configuration B4,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a high-probability state effect (for example, a first band display effect) indicating the high-probability state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B5.

According to the preferred configuration B5, by executing the high-probability state effect, it is possible to easily grasp the high-probability state.

In preferred configuration B4 or preferred configuration B5,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a fanning effect) suggesting that the state is shifted to the high-probability state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B6.

According to the preferred configuration B6, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for being controlled to a high probability state by executing the suggestive effect.

(3) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
An amusement machine equipped with effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, first control unit 400, second control unit 500, etc.),
The effect means is means capable of executing a band display effect (for example, a band display effect) for scrolling a band-shaped display displayed in a predetermined display area (hereinafter referred to as effect display area),
The band display effect includes a first band display effect (e.g., first band display effect) and a second band display effect (e.g., second band display effect),
The first band display effect is a effect in which the first information (for example, information indicating that the seven 1 symbol, blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state) is displayed,
The second band display effect is a effect in which second information different from the first information (for example, information indicating a pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state) is displayed,
The effect means scrolls the first band display effect in a first direction (for example, upward), and scrolls the second band display effect in a second direction different from the first direction (for example, It is a means for scrolling diagonally downward to the left),
This is the third basic configuration.

According to the third basic configuration, information can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by differentiating the scroll directions of the two band display effects having different display contents.

In the third basic configuration,
The display color of the first band display effect is a color different from the display color of the second band display effect,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C1.

According to the preferred configuration C1, by making the colors of the two band display effects with different display contents different from each other, it is possible to notify the information in an easy-to-understand manner.In the third basic configuration or the preferred configuration C1,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, the main control unit 300, game state control processing);
with
When a specific pattern (for example, Seven 1 pattern) is stopped and displayed, it is more advantageous to the player than when the specific pattern is not stopped and displayed (for example, AT stock number, transition to pseudo BB, special , etc.) is high,
The game state includes a special state advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo BB state),
The first information is information about the specific design,
The second information is information about the special condition,
This is referred to as preferred configuration C2.

It should be noted that "a specific pattern" means one pattern or a plurality of patterns, and "a specific pattern is stopped and displayed" includes a specific pattern combination.

According to the preferred configuration C2, it is possible to display the information regarding the specific symbol and the information regarding the special game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

In preferred configuration C2,
The effect display area has an area that overlaps an area in which the plurality of reels are displayed (hereinafter referred to as a reel display area),
The effect means is a means for displaying the first band display effect in an area where the effect display area and the reel display area do not overlap (for example, FIGS. 71 to 73),
This is referred to as preferred configuration C3.

According to the preferred configuration C3, the first band display effect displaying information about the specific symbol is scroll-displayed in an area that does not overlap with the reel display area. can be pressed.

In preferred configuration C3,
The second band display effect is a effect in which a plurality of character strings indicating the second information (e.g., bonus high probability) are arranged at predetermined intervals (e.g., interval S2),
The effect means spreads the second band display effect over both a first area that does not overlap with the reel display area and a second area (for example, area R1) that overlaps with the reel display area. is a means of scrolling by
The rendering means is means for displaying all of the one character string in the first region at a predetermined timing (for example, when execution of the second band display rendering is started) (for example, FIG. 71 to FIG. 71). 73),
This is referred to as preferred configuration C4.

According to the preferred configuration C4, even if the second band display effect overlaps the reel display area, the timing is provided to allow the character information for one phrase to be completely visually recognized, so the information of the second band display effect can be clearly shown.

In a third basic configuration, preferred configuration C1, preferred configuration C2, preferred configuration C3, or preferred configuration C4,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a fan effect) that suggests that the band display effect will be performed.
This is referred to as preferred configuration C5.

According to the preferred configuration C5, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the execution of the band display effect.

In a third basic configuration, preferred configuration C1, preferred configuration C2, preferred configuration C3, preferred configuration C4, or preferred configuration C5,
The effect means is means capable of simultaneously executing the first band display effect and the second band display effect,
When simultaneously executing the first band display effect and the second band display effect, the effect means sets the display area for the first band display effect to at least the display area for the second band display effect. Means for overlapping and displaying a part and displaying the second band display effect in front of the first band display effect in the overlapping area (for example, FIG. 71),
This is referred to as preferred configuration C6.

According to the preferred configuration C6, the second band display effect overlapping the reel display area is less visible than the first band display area, so it is displayed in front of the first band display area. This makes it easier to see.

(4) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
Acquired number display means (eg, main control unit 300, first sub-control 400, second sub-control unit 500, medal insertion/start operation reception processing, medal payout processing),
The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state (eg, non-ending state) and a second advantageous gaming state (eg, ending state),
The acquired number display means
In the first advantageous gaming state, at the timing when the bet amount is set, the winning number display calculated according to the bet amount is updated, and at the timing when the game value is awarded, according to the given game value update the display of the number of acquisitions calculated (for example, FIG. 74(a)),
In the second advantageous gaming state, at the timing when the bet amount is set, the winning number display calculated according to the bet amount is not updated, and at the timing when the game value is awarded, the given game value and the relevant Means for updating the winning number display calculated according to the bet number set in the game (for example, FIG. 74(b)),
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, in the first advantageous gaming state, the number of acquisitions is displayed in accordance with the increase/decrease opportunity, while in the second advantageous gaming state, the display of the number of acquisitions is updated when the game value is increased. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the game value is reduced.

In the fourth basic configuration,
Internal winning result determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) for determining an internal winning combination based on lottery information;
game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, the main control unit 300, game state control processing);
with
The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which an operation mode (for example, operation navigation) corresponding to the internal winning combination is notified,
The game state control means is a means for terminating the advantageous game state when an update value (for example, the number of medals obtained) that is updated as the game progresses reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 2400),
The game state control means is a means for shifting to the second game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first game state (for example, the number of acquired coins reaches 2000),
The second gaming state is a state in which it is identifiable that the update value reaches the predetermined upper limit value.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D1.

According to the preferred configuration D1, in the second advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to specify that the advantageous gaming state will end, when the bet amount is set, the winning number display is not updated, and the game value is set. Since the display of the number of wins is updated at the opportunity of increasing , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the game value is decreasing.

In preferred configuration D1,
Equipped with an advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section) that includes the advantageous gaming state,
The acquired number display means
In the first advantageous gaming state, updating the acquired number based on a first counter (for example, a net increase number counter) that counts the gaming value in the advantageous gaming state,
In the second advantageous gaming state, means for updating the acquired number based on a second counter (for example, MY counter) that counts the game value in the advantageous interval,
the updated value is the value of the second counter;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D2.

According to the preferred configuration D2, in the second advantageous gaming state, the acquired number is displayed with reference to the counter that is counted after the advantageous interval is started, so the feeling that the game value has been acquired up to the upper limit of the advantageous interval. can be given to the player.

In preferred configuration D2,
The gaming state control means is means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when a specific condition is established before the update value reaches the predetermined upper limit (for example, the AT state stock number is 0). ,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the advantageous interval ends together with the first gaming state, both the first counter and the second counter are initialized,
While the specific condition is established in the first gaming state, the first gaming state ends, while the advantageous section continues, the first counter is initialized, while the second counters are not initialized,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D3.

According to the preferred configuration D3, the second counter is not initialized even after the first advantageous gaming state ends, so the player can grasp the number of wins in the advantageous section.

(5) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) operable by the player;
Production means for executing production (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-controller 400, second sub-controller 500, etc.);
A game machine comprising
The effect means performs a first operation prompt effect (for example, a first operation prompt effect of displaying effect image d31) to prompt the user to operate the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means, when the first operation promotion effect is executed and the first operation means is operated, produces a first response effect (for example, a first operation response effect of displaying a effect image d32). is a viable means,
The effect means produces a second operation promotion effect (for example, effect image d31) prompting the user to operate the first operation means at a second timing after the first time (for example, after effect image d32 is displayed). It is a means that can execute the second operation promotion effect that displays the
The effect means, when the second operation promotion effect is executed and the first operation means is operated, produces a second response effect (for example, a second operation response effect of displaying a effect image d33). is a viable means,
The effect means is means capable of executing the second response effect when the first operation promotion effect is executed and the second operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 75),
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, when the operation prompting effect prompting the operation of the first operation means is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the second operation means for which the operation is not prompted is operated. Since the second response performance is executed even in the case of doing so, it is possible to achieve both smooth progress of the game and progress of performance.

In the fifth basic configuration,
The effect means is means for not executing the first response effect when the first operation promotion effect is executed and the second operation means is operated.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E1.

According to the preferred configuration E1, the first response effect can be a dedicated effect when the first operation prompting effect is executed and the first operating means is operated.

In a fifth basic configuration, or preferred configuration E1,
The effect means is means capable of executing the second response effect when the second operation promotion effect is executed and the second operation means is operated.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E2.

According to the preferred configuration E2, the second response effect is executed regardless of whether the second operation promotion effect is executed and the first operation means is operated, or the second operation means is operated. It can be a common production that

In the fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, or preferred configuration E2,
Giving determination means (e.g., main control unit 300, etc.) for determining the granting of benefits advantageous to the player (e.g., granting the number of AT stocks, granting a pseudo bonus, transitioning to a specialized state, etc.);
The first response effect is an effect (for example, FIG. 75) that can specify whether or not an advantageous privilege is given,
The second response effect is an effect that can specify the content of the privilege to be granted (for example, FIG. 75),
This is the preferred configuration E3.

According to the preferred configuration E3, even if the first response effect is not executed, the second response effect can be executed, the content of the privilege to be given can be grasped, and the interest of the operation promotion effect can be increased. It can prevent scraping.

In a fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, preferred configuration E2, or preferred configuration E3,
The first operation means is an operation means related to execution of production,
The second operation means is an operation means related to the progress of the game,
This is the preferred configuration E4.

According to the preferred configuration E4, when the operation promotion effect of the operation means related to the execution of the effect is being performed, even if the operation means related to the progress of the game is operated, the response effect is executed, so the game can be played in a smooth flow. Since it is possible to perform an operation related to the progress and the response performance is not completely canceled, the contents of the response performance can also be grasped.

In a fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, preferred configuration E2, preferred configuration E3, or preferred configuration E4,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
with
Each of the first timing and the second timing is included in the period from the instruction to start rotation in a certain game to the instruction to start rotation in the game next to the certain game,
The second timing is the timing after the production means executes the first response production (for example, FIG. 75),
This is the preferred configuration E5.

According to the preferred configuration E5, the operation promotion effect can be executed twice in one game, and stepwise notification can be performed by the first operation and the second operation.

In preferred configuration E5,
The effect means is means for executing neither the first response effect nor the second response effect when receiving the instruction to start rotation before executing the first response effect,
The effect means executes the first response effect and does not execute the second response effect when receiving the rotation start instruction before executing the second response effect. be,
This is the preferred configuration E6.

According to the preferred configuration E6, when the response effect is executed even if the start operation is detected, it becomes difficult to understand what is being notified, and the player may be confused. confusion can be prevented.

In a fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, preferred configuration E2, preferred configuration E3, preferred configuration E4, preferred configuration E5, or preferred configuration E6,
internal winning combination determination means (eg, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) for determining internal winning combinations based on lottery information;
The internal winning combination includes a replay combination (for example, replay combination 1, 2, etc.),
a first light-emitting means (for example, a PUSH button 192 lamp) that notifies that an operation can be accepted for the first operation means;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a bet button 132 lamp) that notifies that an operation can be accepted for the second operation means;
with
The first light emitting means is means for emitting light when the effect means is executing either the first operation promoting effect or the second operation promoting effect,
The second light emitting means causes the effect means to emit either the first operation promotion effect or the second operation promotion effect even when the replaying combination is determined as the internal winning combination. is a means of emitting light when running,
This is the preferred configuration E7.

According to the preferred configuration E7, since the response effect is canceled when the start operation is performed, in the case of winning the replay role, both the operation reception for the first operation means and the second operation means are valid. It can be notified that any response effect can be executed.

(6) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player and is related to execution of the effect;
A second operating means (for example, a bet button 132) that is operable by the player and related to the progress of the game;
a first light-emitting means (for example, a PUSH button 192 lamp) that notifies that an operation can be accepted for the first operation means;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a bet button 132 lamp) that notifies that an operation can be accepted for the second operation means;
Production means for executing production (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-controller 400, second sub-controller 500, etc.);
A game machine comprising
The effect means is a means capable of executing an operation promoting effect (for example, a first operation promoting effect of displaying an effect image d31) to prompt the operation of the first operating means,
The effect means, when the operation promotion effect is executed and the first operation means is operated, a response effect (for example, a first operation response effect of displaying a effect image d32, a second effect of displaying a effect image d33, Second operation response performance) is a means capable of executing,
The effect means is means capable of executing the response effect (for example, a second operation response effect of displaying effect image d33) when the operation promotion effect is executed and the second operation means is operated. can be,
The first light emitting means is means for emitting light regardless of the result of the internal winning combination lottery when the operation promoting effect is executed,
The second light emitting means is means for emitting light regardless of the lottery result of the internal winning combination when the operation promoting effect is executed (for example, FIG. 75).
This is the sixth basic configuration.

According to the sixth basic configuration, it is possible to grasp the content of the response effect even when the second operating means is operated while ignoring the prompting of the operation for the first operating means. When the operation prompting effect is executed, the second light emitting means is caused to emit light regardless of the winning combination lottery result, so that it is possible to notify that the operation on the second operating means is effective. That is, it is possible to achieve both smooth game progress and performance progress.

In the sixth basic configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
with
The operation-promoting effect includes a first operation-promoting effect (for example, a first operation-promoting effect of displaying the effect image d31) executed at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation); a second operation-promoting effect (for example, a second operation-promoting effect that displays the effect image d31) executed at a second timing (for example, after displaying the effect image d32) after the timing of
The response effects include a first response effect (for example, a first operation response effect that displays a effect image d32) and a second response effect (for example, a second operation response effect that displays a effect image d33). , including
The effect means is means capable of executing the first response effect when the first operation promotion effect is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The effect means is means capable of executing the second response effect when the second operation promotion effect is executed and the first operation means is operated,
Each of the first timing and the second timing is included in the period from the instruction to start rotation in a certain game to the instruction to start rotation in the game next to the certain game,
The second timing is the timing after the production means executes the first response production,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F1.

According to the preferred configuration F1, the operation promotion effect can be executed twice in one game, and stepwise notification can be performed by the first operation and the second operation.

In preferred configuration F1,
The effect means is means capable of executing the second response effect when the first operation promotion effect is executed and the second operation means is operated,
The effect means is means capable of executing the second response effect when the second operation promotion effect is executed and the second operation means is operated.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F2.

According to the preferred configuration F2, the second response effect is executed regardless of whether the second operation promotion effect is executed and the first operation means is operated, or the second operation means is operated. It can be a common production that

In preferred configuration F1 or preferred configuration F2,
The second operation means is an operation means for setting a game value to be played in a game as a bet number,
The second light emitting means does not emit light when a replay in which the game can be played without setting the game value as the number of bets is established and when the operation promoting effect is not executed,
The second light emitting means emits light when a replay in which the game can be played without setting the game value as the number of bets is established and when the operation promoting effect is executed.
This is the preferred configuration F3.

According to the preferred configuration F3, in the case of winning a replay combination, it is possible to indicate that the acceptance of the operation for the second operation means is valid, and to notify that the response effect can also be executed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those involving such variations and modifications are also intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to

<<Embodiment 1>>
77 to 93, a game table (for example, a reel game machine such as a slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 77 to 93 are used only in the explanation using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 93, priority is given to the symbols shown in FIGS.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 77 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 (housing) and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 101. (door body);

Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101 (see FIG. 83). configured to rotate. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110 to 112, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. there is

By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light part and the light-receiving part. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress (special game state). is a lamp. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role that is one of the winning roles in the previous game. It's a lamp to let you know. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The number-of-payouts display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a pushing-order effect. In this example, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. The operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order (or push order).

The order of operation (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is as follows: left stop button 137 is indicated by "left or R", middle stop button 138 by "middle or C", and right stop button 139 by "right or R". , (1) left->middle->right operation order (left-center-right or LCR), (2) left->right->center operation order (left-right-center or LRC), (3) center->left->right operation order ( (Central Right Left or CLR), (4) Middle→Right→Left Operation Order (Center Right Left or CRL), (5) Right→Left→Center Operation Order (Right Left Center or RLC), (6) Right→Center→Left There are six types of operation order (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 . The sound hole 180 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加

This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (hereinafter referred to as a When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (the player side).

It should be noted that any display device other than the liquid crystal display device may be used as long as it is capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. 78 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view showing various members arranged inside the main body 101. As shown in FIG.

The main body 101 is a box surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate (left side plate) 262, a right side plate (right side plate) 263, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and having an opening in the front. In a predetermined area (second area SE; see FIG. 81) on the inner wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 (board case) housing a main control board 210a (board; see FIG. 79) is provided. ) are arranged, and three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below the main control board storage case 210 . On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 262, a sub control board housing case 220 containing a sub control board 220a (see FIG. 79) is arranged.

Note that the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged is not limited to this example, and the area (first area FE, see FIG. , in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294), at least a portion thereof does not overlap (non-overlapping). It may be an area, or an area in the top plate 261 , the left side plate 262 , or the right side plate 263 .

Also, on the inner wall of the right side plate 263, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board 210a and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device. The external collective terminal plate 248 is provided with an external cable connecting portion for connecting an external cable (not shown) extending from an information input circuit 652 (see FIG. 80) provided in a hall computer (not shown) or the like. An external cable is inserted into the main body 101 through a cable hole 292 (see FIG. 81) opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 and connected to the external cable connecting portion of the external common terminal plate 248 .

A medal dispensing device 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the inner wall of the lower plate 264, and a medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180. An overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown).

A power supply box 252 having a power supply board is arranged on the left side of the token payout device 180 in front view, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply box 252 . The power supply box 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later, and each device. do. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

According to this example, the power switch 244 cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened. Therefore, even if an outlet with a different supply power is accidentally connected, the power can be turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet. can be prevented.

The power supply box 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 (see FIG. 81). (See FIGS. 79 and 81).

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 262 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 .

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting the key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 77). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

According to this example, since a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102, a person other than the administrator connects to an outlet with a different supply power and immediately turns on the power. can be prevented.

Above the symbol display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 79, a medal replenisher hole 295 through which a replenishment nozzle of a medal replenisher (not shown) can be inserted is formed substantially in the center of the back plate 242. A plate-like medal replenisher cover 296 is detachably attached to the replenisher hole 295 . 79 is a grip portion (handle) attached to the left side plate 262 and the right side plate 263. As shown in FIG.

<Control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 shows a circuit block diagram of the controller.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control part>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watch dog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 (this circuit contains two random number generation circuits) that derives a numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a. and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 Game control is started (main control unit main processing, which will be described later, is started).

A random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers used in the basic circuit 302 . Random number generation in the random number generation circuit 316 can be broadly divided into two methods: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained and derived as a random number. There are two more methods in random mode. A first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method is to read numerical values from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical values as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random value generation circuit 316 uses the value obtained in this way as the initial value of the counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random value, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical type of reel 110 sensor, optical sensor of the reel 111, optical sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through. It becomes L level every time. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 for driving a motor, various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a notification lamp 123, a game medal insertion possible lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display A driving circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 (external collective terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power box 252 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply A low voltage signal is output to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than the value (9v in this embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-controller 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main controller 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. It is

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426. The sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a pressing operation of the production button 156. is connected to the effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the . The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 performs various controls of the production device 160 including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157 . The second sub control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units such as .

The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. 512 and are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

<Body>
Next, the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a rear view showing an example of the arrangement of the voltage display sticker 294, and FIG. 82 is a rear view showing an example of the arrangement of the voltage display sticker 294, showing various dimensions.

Here, in the rear view shown in FIG. 82, the symbol w indicates the width of the main body 101 and the symbol h indicates the height of the main body 101. As shown in FIG. Further, in the figure, the dotted line with reference sign M1 indicates the center (center) in the width direction of the main body 101, and the dotted line with reference sign M2 indicates the center (center) in the height direction of the main body 101. . Note that, in the subsequent drawings, there are cases where the description of the reference numerals M1 and M2 is omitted, and only the corresponding dotted lines are illustrated, in order to give priority to the visibility of the drawings.

In addition, in the explanation of the rear view hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the right side and right end (left side and left end in front view) of the slot machine 100 will be referred to simply as "right side" and "right side". The left side and left end when viewed from the front (right side and right end when viewed from the front) are simply referred to as "left side" and "left end".

As shown in FIG. 81, the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 is roughly divided into three regions: an upper region 242a, a central region 242b, and a lower region 242c. can do.

In the upper region 242a of the outer wall of the rear plate 242, there are a first ventilation hole 281 for ventilating the main body 101, a screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210, and an external collective terminal plate 248 (Fig. 78) is formed to allow an external cable to pass therethrough. The cable hole 292 also functions as a ventilation hole for ventilating the main body 101 .

<Back/upper area>
As shown in FIG. 82, the first ventilation hole 281 is an elongated elliptical hole having a vertical width of x and a horizontal width of y (x>y), and has the same shape as a fourth ventilation hole 284 described later. In this example, in the upper region 242a of the outer wall of the back plate 242, the first ventilation holes 281 are divided into two regions, ie, an upper region and a lower region.

A predetermined number (19 in this example) of first ventilation holes 281 are formed at approximately equal intervals from the right end to the left end of the rear panel 242 in the upper region, while the main body 101 is formed in the lower region. In the vicinity of the right end and left end of the outer wall of the rear plate 242, so that the main control board storage case 210 housed inside the main control board storage case 210 and the main body 101 in the thickness direction (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294) do not overlap (overlap), A predetermined number (four in this example) of first ventilation holes 281 are formed at approximately equal intervals.

According to this example, since the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the first ventilation holes 281 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the main body 101, the main control board can be stored through the first ventilation holes 281. It is possible to prevent an act such as accessing the back surface of the case 210, to prevent fraudulent acts on the main control board 210a, and to improve the security of the gaming machine.

The screw hole 290 is composed of an insertion hole through which a screw (not shown) can be inserted, and a pedestal consisting of an annular recess disposed outside the insertion hole. is the part of In this example, a predetermined number (four in this example) of screw holes 290 are formed in the center of the upper region 242a.

As shown in FIG. 82, the cable hole 292 is a circular hole with a diameter d, and has the same shape as the second ventilation hole 282 and the third ventilation hole 283 which will be described later. In this example, a predetermined number (one in this example) of cable holes 292 are formed below the first ventilation holes 281 at the left end of the outer wall of the rear panel 242 .

<Back/central area>
A voltage display sticker 294 (display means) on which a voltage display is written is attached to the central region 242b of the outer wall of the back plate 242, and a second ventilation hole 282 for ventilating the main body 101 and a second 3 ventilation holes 283 and a rectangular protrusion 297 having a predetermined thickness are formed. In this example, an example in which the rectangular projections 297 are formed on the back plate 242 is shown. , the shape is not limited to a rectangular shape, and may be a square shape, an elliptical shape, or the like (the same applies to other embodiments).

As shown in FIG. 82, the voltage display sticker 294 is a horizontally long rectangular sticker having a vertical width s1 and a horizontal width t1 (s1<t1). Are listed. The display on the voltage display sticker 294 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in a region (first region FE) located in the center in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing). there is

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged with an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101, and the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101 are arranged at a lower distance s3 (second distance) from the lower end 101D (the other end) facing the .

Vertical width s1 of voltage display sticker 294, upper distance s2 (shortest distance from upper end of voltage display sticker 294 to upper end 101U of main body 101), lower distance s3 (shortest distance from lower end of voltage display sticker 294 to lower end 101D of main body 101) The shortest distance) is s1<s2<s3, and the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3. are placed.

In addition, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged with a left distance t2 (first distance) from the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101, and the right end 101R (other end) at a right distance t3 (second distance).

Width t1 of voltage display sticker 294, left distance t2 (shortest distance from left end of voltage display sticker 294 to left end 101L of outer wall of main body 101), right distance t3 (shortest distance from right end of voltage display sticker 294 to right end 101R of outer wall of main body 101) The shortest distance) is t2<t1<t3, where the left side distance t2 is shorter than the right side distance t3, and the voltage display sticker 294 is positioned closer to the outer wall left end 101L than the outer wall right end 101R of the main body 101. are placed in

According to this example, by arranging the information indicating the rated voltage and the like on the outer wall of the main body 101, the worker can easily install and transport the game machine without opening the door as in the case of the conventional game machine. The voltage can be easily and reliably confirmed, and the convenience of the operator can be enhanced.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). It is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat emitted from the voltage display sticker 294 and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like described on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

The second ventilation hole 282 and the third ventilation hole 283 are, as shown in FIG. 82, circular holes having a diameter d and having the same shape as the cable hole 292 described above. In this example, a predetermined number (one in this example) of second ventilation holes 282 are formed below the voltage display sticker 294 at the central left end of the back plate 242, and below the second ventilation holes 282, a predetermined number of A number (one in this example) of third ventilation holes 283 are formed.

In this example, the vertical width x and horizontal width y of the first ventilation hole 281, the diameter d of the second ventilation hole 282, the third ventilation hole 282, and the cable hole 292 are the same as the vertical width s1 and horizontal width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294. It is designed to be smaller than

With such a configuration, even if the voltage display sticker 294 is peeled off during installation or transportation of the slot machine 100, the damaged voltage display sticker 294 can be removed from the first ventilation hole 281 and the second ventilation hole 281. It is possible to prevent a situation in which an object enters the inside of the main body 101 through the ventilation hole 282, the third ventilation hole 282, the cable hole 292, and the like.

A rectangular convex portion 297 having a predetermined thickness is formed in the central region 242b of the back plate 242. As shown in FIG. A medal replenisher hole 295 (see FIG. 79) is formed in a part of this convex portion 297, and a medal replenisher lid 296 is detachable so as to block the medal replenisher hole 295. attached to the

In this example, since the thickness of the voltage display sticker 294 is made thinner than the thickness of the convex portion 297, there is no possibility that an operator or an obstacle touches the back plate 242 during installation or transportation of the slot machine 100. In some cases, however, the convex portion 297 can prevent contact with the voltage display sticker 294, and deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 can be prevented.

The shape and position of the convex portion 297 are not particularly limited. If the side surface (surface on the back side) of the face plate 263) protrudes from the surface of the back plate 242, and the thickness of the voltage display sticker 294 is made thinner than the height of the protruding portion of the left side plate 262 (or the right side plate 263), Even if the operator touches the back plate 242, the protruding portion of the left side plate 262 (or the right side plate 263) may prevent contact with the voltage display sticker 294, and the deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 may occur. can be prevented. In other words, if there is a step between the edge of the back of the housing (left and right side plates) and the back plate on the back of the housing, the thickness of the voltage display sticker should be thinner (lower) than the thickness of the step difference. , deterioration and damage can be prevented.

<Back/lower area>
A lower region 242c of the rear plate 242 is formed with a fourth ventilation hole 284 and a fifth ventilation hole 285 for ventilating the main body 101, and a power cord hole 266 for inserting the power cord 265 therethrough. The power cord hole 266 also functions as a ventilation hole for ventilating the main body 101 .

The fourth ventilation hole 284 has the same shape as the first ventilation hole 281 described above, and is a vertically elongated elliptical hole having a vertical width of x and a horizontal width of y (x>y). In this example, the center of the back plate 242 is divided into two regions, an upper region and a lower region, and each region has a predetermined number (nine in this example) of fourth electrodes at approximately equal intervals. Ventilation holes 284 are formed.

The fifth ventilation hole 285 is an elliptical hole having a vertical width smaller than that of the fourth ventilation hole 284 and a maximum diameter smaller than that of the cable hole 292 . In this example, a predetermined number (nine in this example) of fifth ventilation holes 285 are formed at approximately equal intervals below the fourth ventilation holes 284 .

The power cord hole 266 has a larger diameter than the second ventilation hole 282, the third ventilation hole 283, and the cable hole 292, and the power cord 265 connected to the power supply box 252 is inserted through it. In this example, a predetermined number (one in this example) of power cord holes 266 are formed on the right side of the fifth ventilation hole 285 .

The “power cord” according to the present invention is the one in which the power cord 265 and the power box 252 are connected inside the main body 101, and the power cord 256 is pulled out of the main body 101 through the power cord hole 266 (drawer type power cord). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the power cord from being lost.

Also, the “power cord” according to the present invention may be a plug-type power cord that is inserted into a connector of a power box (power supply device) exposed from the back of the main body 101 . With such a configuration, it is possible to save the trouble of pulling out the power cord from the inside of the main body 101 to the outside. Also, whether it is a pull-out type power cord or a plug-in type power cord, the power cord is arranged on the back of the main body 101, and is extended toward an outlet of the amusement arcade or the like.

<Voltage display sticker>
Next, the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84(a). FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 and some members of the main body 101 removed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in the first region FE on the outer wall (outer wall of the housing) of the back plate 242 of the main body 101, and the main control board storage case. 210 (substrate case) is arranged in the second area SE on the inner wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the housing). This is a non-overlapping area on the face plate 242 (housing).

In this example, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged (first area FE) overlaps with the main body 101 in the thickness direction (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294) (the first area faces the thickness direction). The area of the inner wall where the main control board storage case 210 is included is arranged so as not to place any member.

Specifically, in FIG. 83, a gray area surrounded by a dashed line indicates an area (first area FE) to which the voltage display sticker 294 is attached. As is clear from the first region FE shown in FIG. 81 and the second region SE shown in FIG. The arrangement position (second region SE) has a positional relationship in which they do not overlap in the plan view of the voltage display sticker 294 (the facing positional relationship between the first region FE and the second region SE).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat emitted from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

FIG. 84(a) is a front view of the voltage display sticker 294. FIG. The display written on the voltage display sticker 294 can be roughly classified into a logo mark 294a, device information 294b, and notes 294c. The logo mark 294a is a figure, characters, or the like representing the manufacturer of the slot machine 100, and in this example, describes the trademark of the manufacturer.

The device information 294b is information about the slot machine 100, and in this example, describes the manufacturer's name, rated frequency, rated voltage, rated power consumption, maximum input current, and place of use.

According to this example, by arranging the information indicating the rated voltage on the back plate 242 of the main body 100, the operator can reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the slot machine 100, and the rated voltage is It is possible to prevent a situation in which a different voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, the power supply box 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and each device. However, in this example, the voltage value after conversion by the power supply box 252 (9 V in this example) is not displayed as the device information 294 .

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the operator from mistaking the converted voltage value for the rated voltage, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the voltage value after conversion by the power supply box 252 may be displayed on a device (for example, the power supply box 252) arranged inside the main body 101, a board, or the like. In addition, items to be described in the device information 294 are not limited to this example. may be described.

Precautions 294c describe precautions for handling the slot machine 100, and in this example, "Do not get wet", "Do not block ventilation holes", "Grounding". Please do this,” and “Do not modify or insert foreign objects into the product.”

The voltage display sticker 294 is a colored opaque sticker containing white (a certain color). 294c is a black character, and the white color of the base is a color different from the color of the rear panel 242 (black in this example).

According to this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is configured to include a color (white) different from the color (black) of the rear plate 242, so that the voltage display sticker 294 can be conspicuous and the slot machine can be used. When installing or transporting the device 100, the operator can reliably check the voltage.

Note that the voltage display sticker 294 is not limited to a sticker, and may be a label or sticker. Also, in this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is directly attached to the outer wall of the housing, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the plate to which the seal is attached may be used as the voltage display label.

FIGS. 84(b) to 84(d) are front views of voltage display stickers according to modifications.

The voltage display sticker shown in FIG. 84(b) is a colored opaque sticker containing white or silver (certain color). The equipment information 294b and the notes 294c are white or silver characters, and the black color of the base is a color different from the color of the rear plate 242 (black in this example).

According to this example, since the voltage display sticker 294 is configured to include a color (white or silver) different from the color (black) of the back plate 242, the voltage display sticker 294 can be conspicuous. When installing or transporting the slot machine 100, the operator can reliably check the voltage.

The voltage display sticker shown in FIG. 84(c) is the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIG. 84(a) from which notes 294c are deleted, and is composed of a logo mark 294a and device information 294b. .

According to this example, by omitting notes, the rated voltage described in the device information 294b can be made more conspicuous. can be made

The voltage display sticker shown in FIG. 84(d) is obtained by deleting the logo mark 294a and the notes 294c from the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIG. 84(a), and simplifying the contents of the device information 294b. It contains the minimum required items.

According to this example, by omitting the logo mark and notes, the rated voltage described in the device information 294b can be made more conspicuous. can be confirmed with certainty.

Also, the voltage display stickers shown in FIGS. 84(c) and (d) are smaller in size than the voltage display stickers shown in FIGS. can be raised. In addition, it is preferable that the voltage display sticker 294 is attached to a position that does not overlap (do not overlap) a member such as a substrate inside the housing or a screw hole for attaching a member in plan view of the voltage display sticker 294. As shown in FIGS. 84(c) and 84(d), by making the size small, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the members inside the housing, and the positional relationship between the sticking position and the members inside the housing. The degree of freedom can be increased in

The color of the outer wall of the main body 101 is not particularly limited. For example, if the main body 101 is made of metal (for example, aluminum), it may be metallic color, and if it is made of wood, it may be the natural color of wood. (uncolored). Moreover, a part of the main body 101 may be colored. For example, when the back plate 242 of the main body 101 is the natural color of wood (uncolored), the top plate 261 surrounding the back plate 242 on all four sides, the left The face plate 262, the right side plate 263, and the lower face plate 264 may be colored black. In this case, the voltage display sticker 294 may include a color other than black (or the natural color of wood).

As described above, the game table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 77) is a box-shaped housing having an opening in front (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIG. 77). , a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 77) arranged to be openable and closable in the opening of the housing, and a power switch (for example, the power switch 244 shown in FIGS. 78 and 3). A game machine equipped with a device (for example, a power supply box 252 shown in FIGS. 78 and 3) and display means for indicating a certain display (for example, a voltage display sticker 294 shown in FIGS. 81 and 84(a)). The power switch is operable when the door is in an open state, the certain display includes a rated voltage display indicating the rated voltage of the gaming machine, and the display means is a display of the housing. A game characterized by being arranged in a first area FE in the outer wall (for example, a position closer to the upper end 101U than the lower end 101D of the main body 101 and closer to the outer wall left end 101L than the outer wall right end 101R shown in FIG. 82). It is a table.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by arranging the information indicating the rated voltage etc. on the outer wall of the housing, it is possible to set up the game machine without opening the door like the conventional game machine. A worker can easily and reliably check the voltage during transportation, and the convenience of the worker can be improved.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

In addition, a board case (for example, the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIGS. 78 and 3) that can accommodate a certain part (for example, a board (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 79), an external centralization unit shown in FIG. terminal plate 248), and the certain component is arranged in a second region (for example, second region SE shown in FIG. 81 and the like) on the inner wall of the housing, and The region may be a region that at least partially does not overlap in plan view of the display means.

With such a configuration, the position where the substrate case and the display means (voltage display sticker) are attached does not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). To ensure safety by preventing display means (voltage display sticker) from deteriorating due to heat emitted from the display means (voltage display sticker) and obscuring the display of rated voltage, etc. written on the display means (voltage display sticker). can be done.

Further, the display means is a label including a certain color (for example, white (color of base and characters), silver (color of characters)), and the certain color is the outer wall of the housing. may be a color different from the color of (eg, black).

With such a configuration, the presence of the label (voltage display sticker) on the housing can be conspicuous, and the operator can reliably confirm the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine.

In addition, the display means displays distances (for example, several millimeters).

With such a configuration, even if a worker touches the housing during installation or transportation of the game table, it may be possible to prevent contact with the display means (voltage display sticker). It is possible to prevent the display means (voltage display sticker) from peeling off from the housing, or from being deteriorated or damaged.

Further, the display means is arranged on the outer wall of the housing at a first distance (for example, the distance s2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the upper end 101U shown in FIG. 82), The display means is arranged on the outer wall of the housing at a second distance (for example, the distance s3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end (for example, the lower end 101D shown in FIG. 82) of the outer wall opposite to the one end of the outer wall. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

Further, the display means is arranged on the outer wall of the housing at a first distance (for example, the distance t2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the left end 101L of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82), The display means, on the outer wall of the housing, is spaced a second distance (for example, the distance t3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end (for example, the outer wall right end 101R shown in FIG. 82) opposite to the one end of the outer wall. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

With such a configuration, the presence of the display means (voltage display sticker) can be detected by arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) so as to be biased toward either one end or the other end of the outer wall of the housing. It can be made conspicuous, and the operator can surely confirm the voltage when the game machine is installed or transported.

Also, in the game machine, power is supplied to the power supply device through a power cord (for example, a power cord 265 shown in FIG. 81), and the game machine extends the power cord from the back of the housing. and the display means may be arranged on the back of the housing.

With such a configuration, when laying the power cord in the installation work of the game machine, etc., the operator can surely check the voltage, and the situation where the voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. can be prevented, and safety can be ensured when the power is turned on.

In addition, when the game machine is installed, the design of the game machine when viewed from the front can be ensured by arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) on the rear surface of the housing that is not visible to the players. In addition, since the player is not touched, the risk of the display means (voltage display sticker) being peeled off or damaged can be reduced.

<Arrangement of Voltage Display Sticker (Modification 1)>
Next, an arrangement example (Modification 1) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 1) of the voltage display sticker 294, showing various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in a region (first region FE) located on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing) on the center in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction. It is arranged in an area closer to the power supply box 252 than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIG.

Specifically, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged with an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101, and the lower end 101D (the other end) facing the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101 end) with a lower distance s3 (second distance) therebetween.

Vertical width s1 of voltage display sticker 294, upper distance s2 (shortest distance from upper end of voltage display sticker 294 to upper end 101U of main body 101), lower distance s3 (shortest distance from lower end of voltage display sticker 294 to lower end 101D of main body 101) The shortest distance) is s1<s2<s3, and the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3. are placed.

In addition, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a position spaced above the center M2 in the height direction of the main body 101 by a distance s5, that is, above the center in the height direction (vertical direction) of the rear plate 242 of the main body 101. It is The power supply box 252 is arranged at a position spaced downward by a distance s4 from the center M2 in the height direction of the main body 101 . The magnitude relationship between the distances s4 and s5 is s5<s4, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a position closer to the center M2 in the height direction of the main body 101 than the power supply box 252 is.

In addition, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged with a left distance t2 (first distance) from the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101, and the right end 101R (other end) at a right distance t3 (second distance).

Width t1 of voltage display sticker 294, left distance t2 (shortest distance from left end of voltage display sticker 294 to left end 101L of outer wall of main body 101), right distance t3 (shortest distance from right end of voltage display sticker 294 to right end 101R of outer wall of main body 101) The shortest distance) is t3<t1<t2, and the right distance t3 is shorter than the left distance t2, and the voltage display sticker 294 is positioned closer to the outer wall right end 101R than the outer wall left end 101L of the main body 101. are placed in

According to this example, by arranging the information indicating the rated voltage etc. on the side where the power supply box 252 is arranged in the left-right direction of the back of the housing (near the power supply device), Even if the door is not opened, the operator can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine, and the convenience of the operator can be improved.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in an area close to the power box 252, the operator can reliably check the voltage when laying the power cord in the installation work of the game machine, etc., and the rated voltage is Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat emitted from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

Further, in this example, the ventilation holes such as the second ventilation hole 282 and the third ventilation hole 283 are not arranged below the area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged. .

With such a configuration, the voltage display seal 294 is not exposed to the warm air discharged from the ventilation holes, and the voltage display seal 294 is deteriorated by the heat discharged from the ventilation holes. It is possible to prevent the display of the rated voltage, etc. from becoming unclear and ensure safety.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 2)>
Next, an arrangement example (Modification 2) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 2) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is positioned in a region (first region FE) located vertically downward and horizontally right on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing). It is arranged in an area closer to the power supply box 252 (upper vicinity of the power supply box 252) than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIG.

Specifically, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the main body 101 The shortest distance to the lower end 101D) is s1<s3<s2, and the lower distance s3 is shorter than the upper distance s2. It is arranged at a position close to 101D.

In addition, the voltage display sticker 294 is positioned at a distance s5 downward from the center M2 in the height direction of the main body 101, that is, below the center in the height direction (vertical direction) of the rear plate 242 of the main body 101. Further, in the area below it, it is arranged at a position (near the power supply box 252) spaced downward from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 by a distance s4. The magnitude relationship between the distances s4 and s5 is s4<s5, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a position closer to the power supply box 252 than the center M2 of the main body 101 in the height direction.

The width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), the right distance t3 (the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101) ) is the same as that of the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIG.

According to this example, by arranging the information indicating the rated voltage etc. on the side where the power supply box 252 is arranged in the left-right direction of the back of the housing (near the power supply device), Even if the door is not opened, the operator can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine, and the convenience of the operator can be improved.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in an area close to the power box 252, the operator can reliably check the voltage when laying the power cord in the installation work of the game machine, etc., and the rated voltage is Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Further, in this example, the area (first area FE) where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged is the same as the power box 252 and the relay board related to the power supply box 252 in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (the voltage display sticker 294 It is preferable that the positional relationship is such that they do not overlap in plan view).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat emitted from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

Also, in this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is configured not to be arranged below the power supply box 252 .

The power supply box is often arranged below the housing, but with such a configuration, there is no possibility that the lower side of the housing will come into contact with an obstacle or the like during the installation or transportation of the slot machine 100. In some cases, it is possible to prevent contact with the voltage display sticker 294 even when the contact is made, thereby preventing deterioration and breakage of the voltage display sticker 294 .

Also, when the power cords 256 are bundled when the slot machine 100 is installed or transported, the voltage display sticker 294 may become difficult to see due to the bundled power cords 256. It is preferable not to arrange the display sticker 294 below the power supply box 252 . In addition, depending on the amusement arcade, there are places where the in-store lighting is dim, and the lower part of the back surface of the housing may become dark during the installation work of the slot machine 100. It is preferable not to place it.

<Arrangement of Voltage Display Stickers (Modification 3)>
Next, an arrangement example (modified example 3) of the voltage display seal 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 3) of the voltage display sticker 294, showing various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is positioned in a region (first region FE) located on the upper side in the vertical direction and the right side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing). It is arranged in an area farther from the power supply box 252 (near the upper end 101U of the main body 101) than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIGS.

Specifically, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the main body 101 The shortest distance to the lower end 101D) is s2<s1<s3. It is located near 101U.

The width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), the right distance t3 (the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101) ) is the same as that of the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIGS.

According to this example, by arranging the information indicating the rated voltage etc. on the side where the power supply box 252 is arranged in the left-right direction of the back of the housing (near the power supply device), Even if the door is not opened, the operator can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine, and the convenience of the operator can be improved.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in an area close to the power box 252, the operator can reliably check the voltage when laying the power cord in the installation work of the game machine, etc., and the rated voltage is Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on. In addition, by attaching the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper region 242a of the back plate 242 at a position close to the upper end 101U of the main body 101, it is easily visible when looking into the back of the housing from the front of the housing. can be

In addition, by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 in the area located above the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction as in this example, the voltage can be displayed by the supply nozzle of the medal supply machine or the mounting member of the supply nozzle. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the seal 294 from being obstructed. Such an effect is the same in an example using FIG. 89, which will be described later. Also, the same effect can be obtained by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 below the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the right or left side in the horizontal direction.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). In addition, in this example, the area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged is not limited to the main control board 210a, but is related to the sub control board 220a (see FIG. 79) or the sub control board 220a. It is preferable to have a positional relationship in which it does not overlap with the relay board or the like in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). In addition, not only the sub control board 220a, but also the production control board (not shown) and the relay board related to the selection control board are preferably in a positional relationship that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). .

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat generated from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

As described above, the gaming machines according to Modifications 1 to 3 (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 77) are box-shaped housings having an opening in the front (for example, FIG. Main body 101 shown in ), a door body arranged to be openable and closable at the opening of the housing (for example, front door 102 shown in FIG. 77), and a power cord (for example, power cord shown in FIGS. 81 and 85 265) and with a power switch (eg, power switch 244 shown in FIG. 78, 3) (eg, power box 252, shown in FIG. 78, 3), and a display showing certain indications means (for example, a voltage display sticker 294 shown in FIGS. 85 and 84(a)), wherein the power switch is operable when the door body is in an open state, and the The power supply device is arranged inside the housing, and the power cord is configured to extend from the back of the housing, and the certain display is a rated voltage display indicating the rated voltage of the gaming machine. The display means includes a first area (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIGS. The game stand is characterized in that it is arranged at a position closer to the outer wall right end 101R than the outer wall left end 101L.

According to the game machines according to Modifications 1 to 3, the information indicating the rated voltage and the like is arranged on the side where the power supply is arranged in the left-right direction of the back of the housing (near the power supply). The operator can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine without having to open the door like the conventional game machine, and the convenience of the operator can be improved. .

In particular, since the display means (voltage display sticker) is placed in an area near the power supply, the operator can reliably check the voltage when laying the power cord in the installation work of the game table, etc. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

In addition, a board case (for example, the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIGS. 78 and 3) that can accommodate a certain part (for example, a board (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 79), an external centralization unit shown in FIG. terminal plate 248), the certain component is arranged in a second region (for example, second region SE shown in FIGS. 85 to 11, etc.) on the inner wall of the housing, and The second area may be an area that at least partially does not overlap in plan view of the display means.

With such a configuration, the position where the substrate case and the display means (voltage display sticker) are attached does not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). To ensure safety by preventing display means (voltage display sticker) from deteriorating due to heat emitted from the display means (voltage display sticker) and obscuring the display of rated voltage, etc. written on the display means (voltage display sticker). can be done.

In addition, the display means is a label including a certain color (for example, white (color of base and characters), silver (color of characters)), and the certain color is the back of the housing. may be a color different from the color of (eg, black).

With such a configuration, the presence of the label (voltage display sticker) on the back of the housing can be conspicuous, and the operator can reliably confirm the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine. .

In addition, the display means is provided at the back of the housing at a distance (for example, , several millimeters).

With such a configuration, even if a worker touches the housing during installation or transportation of the game table, it may be possible to prevent contact with the display means (voltage display sticker). It is possible to prevent the display means (voltage display sticker) from peeling off from the housing, or from being deteriorated or damaged.

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the housing with a first distance (for example, distance s2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, upper end 101U shown in FIG. 82), The display means is arranged on the back of the housing with a second distance (for example, distance s3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end (for example, lower end 101D shown in FIG. 82) of the outer wall facing the one end. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the housing at a first distance (for example, distance t2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the left end 101L of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82), The display means is spaced a second distance (for example, the distance t3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end of the outer wall (for example, the right end 101R of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82) opposite to the one end of the outer wall at the back of the housing. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

With such a configuration, the presence of the display means (voltage display sticker) can be detected by arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) so as to be biased toward either one end or the other end of the outer wall of the housing. It can be made conspicuous, and the operator can surely confirm the voltage when the game machine is installed or transported.

<Arrangement of Voltage Display Sticker (Modification 4)>
Next, an arrangement example (modification 4) of the voltage display seal 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 4) of the voltage display sticker 294, showing various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is positioned in a region (first region FE) located in the upper part in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing). It is arranged closer to the center of the main body 101 than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIG.

Specifically, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a left distance t2 (first distance) from the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101, and the right end of the outer wall facing the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101. It is arranged with a right distance t3 (second distance) from 101R (the other end).

Width t1 of voltage display sticker 294, left distance t2 (shortest distance from left end of voltage display sticker 294 to left end 101L of outer wall of main body 101), right distance t3 (shortest distance from right end of voltage display sticker 294 to right end 101R of outer wall of main body 101) The shortest distance) is t1<t2≈t3, the left distance t2 and the right distance t3 are substantially the same distance, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged substantially in the center of the main body 101 in the left-right direction. there is In addition, the widthwise center of the main body 101 and the widthwise center of the voltage display sticker 294 are substantially aligned.

The vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101). ) is the same as that of the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIG.

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat emitted from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens. In addition, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged on the upper side and substantially in the center of the rear surface of the housing, when the slot machine 100 is being transported or the slot machine 100 is being displayed in the warehouse, it is possible to It is designed to be easily visible when looking into the back.

<Arrangement of Voltage Display Stickers (Modification 5)>
Next, an arrangement example (Modification 5) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 5) of the voltage display sticker 294, showing various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is positioned in a region (first region FE) located on the upper side in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (the outer wall of the housing). It is arranged closer to the left end of the main body 101 than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 described with reference to FIG.

Specifically, the width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), and the right distance t3 (the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the main body 101). The shortest distance to the right end of the outer wall 101R) is t2<t1<t3, and the right side distance t3 is longer than the left side distance t2, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged on the left side of the main body 101 in the left-right direction. It is

Further, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged with an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101, and is arranged from the lower end 101D (the other end) facing the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101. They are arranged at a lower distance s3 (second distance) and are arranged at an inter-cable hole distance s4 from the upper end of the cable hole 292 .

Vertical width s1 of voltage display sticker 294, upper distance s2 (shortest distance from upper end of voltage display sticker 294 to upper end 101U of main body 101), lower distance s3 (shortest distance from lower end of voltage display sticker 294 to lower end 101D of main body 101) The shortest distance) is s2<s1<s3, and the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3. are placed.

Also, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the distance s4 between the cable holes (from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the cable hole 292). , s4<s1, the distance s4 between the cable holes is shorter than the upper distance s2, and the voltage display sticker 294 is closer to the cable hole than the upper end 101U of the main body 101. 292.

By making the upper distance s2 of the voltage display sticker 294 longer than the distance s4 between the cable holes (by setting s4<s2), the voltage display sticker 294 can be arranged closer to the cable hole 292. good. In addition to sticking the voltage indication sticker 294 on the upper side of the cable hole 292 , the voltage indication sticker 294 may be attached on the lower side of the cable hole 292 .

According to this example, the information indicating the rated voltage and the like is stored in the cable a hole 292 through which the cable connected to the external device can be inserted on the side where the power supply box 252 is not arranged in the left and right direction of the rear surface of the housing. By arranging it nearby, the operator can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine without having to open the door like a conventional game machine. can enhance sexuality. In addition, by attaching the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper region 242a of the back plate 242 at a position close to the upper end 101U of the main body 101, it is easily visible when looking into the back of the housing from the front of the housing. can be made

In addition, by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 in the area located above the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction as in this example, the voltage can be displayed by the supply nozzle of the medal supply machine or the mounting member of the supply nozzle. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the seal 294 from being obstructed. Also, the same effect can be obtained by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 below the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the right or left side in the horizontal direction.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in an area near the cable hole 292, when connecting an external cable such as a hall computer to the external centralized terminal board of the game machine during the installation work of the game machine, it is difficult for the operator. can reliably check the voltage, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and it is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). In addition, the region (first region FE) where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged should have a positional relationship that does not overlap the relay board and the external collective terminal plate in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). is preferred.

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat generated from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

Also, in this example, the size of the cable hole 292 is made smaller than the size of the voltage display sticker 294 .

According to this example, even if the voltage display sticker 294 were to come off, it would prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from entering the main body 101 through the cable hole 292 and causing a problem. It becomes possible to

As described above, the game table according to Modification 5 (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 77) is a box-shaped housing having an opening in front (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIG. 77). ), a door body (for example, front door 102 shown in FIG. 77) arranged to be openable and closable at the opening of the housing, and a power cord (for example, power cord 265 shown in FIGS. 81 and 89). a power supply unit (for example, a power box 252 shown in FIGS. 78 and 3) provided with a power switch (for example, the power switch 244 shown in FIG. 78) and a display means for showing a display (for example, the , a voltage display sticker 294) shown in FIG. It is arranged inside the body and the power cord is extended from the back of the housing, the certain display includes a rated voltage display indicating the rated voltage of the game machine, and the display means is , the first region (for example, the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101 shown in FIG. ), and in the vicinity of the first region, an insertion hole through which a cable connectable to an external device can be inserted (for example, a cable hole 292 shown in FIG. 89) is formed. It is a game table that features.

According to the amusement machine according to Modification 5, the information indicating the rated voltage and the like is displayed on the side where the power supply device is not arranged in the left-right direction of the back surface of the housing, and the insertion through which the cable connected to the external device can be inserted. By arranging it near the hole, the operator can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine without having to open the door like a conventional game machine. convenience can be enhanced.

In particular, since the display means (voltage display sticker) is arranged in an area near the insertion hole, when connecting an external cable such as a hall computer to the external centralized terminal board of the game machine during the installation work of the game machine, A worker can surely check the voltage, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and it is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

In addition, conventionally, game machines with a rated voltage of 100V and game machines with a rated voltage of 24V are mixed in the market, and there have been cases where workers mistakenly supply voltage to the game machines. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, since the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door is opened, even if the power supply is mistakenly connected to an outlet with a different supply power, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

In addition, a board case (for example, the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIGS. 78 and 3) that can accommodate a certain part (for example, a board (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 79), an external centralization unit shown in FIG. terminal plate 248), the certain component is arranged in a second region (for example, second region SE shown in FIG. 89) on the inner wall of the housing, and the first region and the second The region may be a region that at least partially does not overlap in plan view of the display means.

With such a configuration, the position where the substrate case and the display means (voltage display sticker) are attached does not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). To ensure safety by preventing display means (voltage display sticker) from deteriorating due to heat emitted from the display means (voltage display sticker) and obscuring the display of rated voltage, etc. written on the display means (voltage display sticker). can be done.

In addition, the display means is a label including a certain color (for example, white (color of base and characters), silver (color of characters)), and the certain color is the back of the housing. may be a color different from the color of (eg, black).

With such a configuration, the presence of the label (voltage display sticker) on the back of the housing can be conspicuous, and the operator can reliably confirm the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine. .

In addition, the display means is provided at the back of the housing at a distance (for example, , several millimeters).

With such a configuration, the presence of the sticker (voltage display sticker) on the back of the housing can be conspicuous, and the operator can reliably confirm the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine. .

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the housing with a first distance (for example, distance s2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, upper end 101U shown in FIG. 82), The display means is arranged on the back of the housing with a second distance (for example, distance s3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end (for example, lower end 101D shown in FIG. 82) of the outer wall facing the one end. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the housing at a first distance (for example, distance t2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the left end 101L of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82), The display means is spaced a second distance (for example, the distance t3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end of the outer wall (for example, the right end 101R of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82) opposite to the one end of the outer wall at the back of the housing. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

With such a configuration, the presence of the display means (voltage display sticker) can be detected by arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) so as to be biased toward either one end or the other end of the outer wall of the housing. It can be made conspicuous, and the operator can surely confirm the voltage when the game machine is installed or transported.

Also, the label may be larger than the insertion hole.

With such a configuration, even if the label is peeled off, it is possible to prevent the label from entering the inside of the housing through the insertion hole and causing a problem. Become.

<Arrangement of Voltage Display Stickers (Modification 6)>
Next, an arrangement example (modification 6) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 6) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is located in a region (first region FE) located substantially in the center (middle) in the vertical and horizontal directions on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing). It is arranged in the vicinity of the lid 296 for the medal replenisher.

Specifically, the vertical width s1, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101). The shortest distance) is s1<s2≈s3, the lower distance s3 and the upper distance s2 are substantially the same distance, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged substantially in the center of the main body 101 in the vertical direction. ing.

Also, the width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), the right distance t3 (the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101) t1<t2≈t3, the left side distance t2 and the right side distance t3 are almost the same, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged almost in the center of the main body 101 in the left-right direction. ing.

In this example, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in the center of the main body 101, the operator can easily notice the presence of the voltage display sticker 294 during installation work of the slot machine 100, etc., and the operator can reliably check the voltage. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in the vicinity of the medal supply machine lid 296, when the medal supply machine lid 296 is opened and the medal supply nozzle of the medal supply machine is inserted during the installation work of the slot machine 100, etc. In addition, the operator can check the voltage with certainty, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and it is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. .

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat generated from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

Further, not limited to this example, the positional relationship is such that the center of the body 101 in the height direction and the center of the voltage display sticker 294 in the vertical direction are substantially aligned, while the center of the body 101 in the width direction and the voltage display sticker 294 A positional relationship in which the centers in the width direction do not match may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent visibility from being hindered by the replenishment nozzle of the medal replenisher or the like.

<Arrangement of Voltage Display Stickers (Modification 7)>
Next, an arrangement example (modified example 7) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 7) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is attached to the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (the outer wall of the housing) in the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE) and in the thickness direction of the main body 101. Although it overlaps in (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294 ), it is arranged in a region that does not come into contact with the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board housing case 210 .

That is, in this example, the area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged and the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged are at least partially overlapped. However, the positional relationship is such that they do not overlap screw holes 290 for fixing members such as substrates.

Specifically, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the main body 101 The shortest distance to the lower end 101D) is s1<s2<s3, and the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3. It is located near 101U.

Also, the width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), the right distance t3 (the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101) t1<t2≈t3, the left side distance t2 and the right side distance t3 are almost the same, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged almost in the center of the main body 101 in the left-right direction. ing. In addition, the widthwise center of the main body 101 and the widthwise center of the voltage display sticker 294 are substantially aligned.

According to this example, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in a region that does not come into contact with the screw hole 290, the voltage display sticker 294 is less likely to peel off and deteriorate. Since the surface area of the substrate storage case 210 is smaller than the surface area of the substrate storage case 210, the influence of the heat emitted from the substrate can be reduced. It is possible to prevent display from becoming unclear and ensure safety.

<Arrangement of Voltage Display Stickers (Modification 8)>
Next, an arrangement example (modified example 8) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a housing side view showing an arrangement example (modification example 8) of the voltage display seal 294, showing various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in a region (first region FE) positioned above the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall (outer wall of the housing) of the right side plate 263 of the main body 101. there is Note that the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, the voltage display sticker 294 may be arranged on the left side plate 262 of the main body 101 . In this case, on the outer wall of the left side plate 262, it may be arranged in a region located above in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction.

Specifically, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged with an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101, and the lower end 101D (the other end) facing the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101 end) with a lower distance s3 (second distance) therebetween.

Vertical width s1 of voltage display sticker 294, upper distance s2 (shortest distance from upper end of voltage display sticker 294 to upper end 101U of main body 101), lower distance s3 (shortest distance from lower end of voltage display sticker 294 to lower end 101D of main body 101) The shortest distance) is s2<s1<s3, and the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3. are placed.

Width t1 of voltage display sticker 294, left distance d1 (shortest distance from left end of voltage display sticker 294 to outer wall left end 263L of right side plate 263 of main body 101), right distance d2 (right end of voltage display sticker 294 to right side of main body 101) The shortest distance to the right end 263R of the outer wall of the face plate 262) is d2<t1<d1, where the distance d2 on the right side is shorter than the distance d1 on the left side. is located closer to the outer wall right end 263R than the outer wall left side 263L.

According to this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is located on the outer wall of the right side plate 263 of the main body 101 in the area located above the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction (that is, when the slot machine 100 is installed on the island facility of the amusement arcade). In addition, since it is hidden between adjacent slot machines and placed in an area where players, etc. cannot easily touch), the voltage display sticker 294 deteriorates, and the rated voltage etc. described on the voltage display sticker 294 It is possible to prevent the display from becoming unclear and ensure safety.

The area (first area FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged is the area (second area SE) in which the main control board storage case 210 is arranged, that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101. In the inner wall of (the inner wall of the housing), the region located at the upper side in the vertical direction and the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294).

Further, even when the external collective terminal plate 248 is installed on the side inner wall of the housing, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged (first region FE) and the external collective terminal plate 248 are arranged. The inner side and the outer side of the same wall member of the housing may have a positional relationship in which the area (second area) where the second area is located does not overlap. Further, the member arranged on the side inner wall of the housing is not limited to the external collective terminal plate 248, and may be a relay board (relay board case) or a sub-control board (sub-control board case). . Further, the substrate is not limited to the one housed in the substrate case, and the substrate itself may be arranged on the inner wall.

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 due to heat emitted from the substrate and obscure display of the rated voltage and the like written on the voltage display sticker 294, thereby ensuring safety.

In addition, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the housing (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, the situation that the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly attached to the main body 101 due to the screw holes or the like becoming an obstacle, or the situation that the display of the rated voltage or the like written on the voltage display sticker 294 becomes difficult to see due to the screw holes or the like. It can be prevented before it happens.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 are not in a positional relationship (twisted positional relationship) between the inside and outside of the same wall member. By doing so, for example, it is possible to prevent damage to the parts inside the housing by forcibly peeling off the voltage display sticker 294 using a tool or the like, which may result in a hole being made in the wall, or forcibly removing the sticker. It is also possible to make it difficult to transmit vibrations at the edge.

<Arrangement of voltage display stickers (other modifications)>
Next, an arrangement example (another modification) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of slot machines 100 stored in a warehouse or the like before being installed on the island facility.

In general, game machines are often stored in a storehouse or the like of amusement arcades in a state in which a plurality of machines are adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction before being installed on the island facility. Since a general game machine has a shape in which the lower part protrudes forward more than the upper part, when the game machine is stored in the state shown in FIG. The lower interval q is shorter than .

Therefore, when the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged on the back plate 242 of the slot machine 100, the voltage display sticker 294 should be placed closer to the rear slot machine 100 than the lower part where it is difficult to secure a gap from the rear slot machine 100. In particular, when the power box 252 is placed at the bottom of the main body 101, it is preferable not to place it below the power box 252. .

With such a configuration, even when a plurality of game machines are stored adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction, a part of the game machines in the rear comes into contact with the voltage display sticker of the game machine in the front. In some cases, such a situation can be prevented, and deterioration and breakage of the voltage display sticker can be prevented.

In addition, in a game machine having a shape in which the upper part protrudes forward more than the lower part, the voltage display sticker should be more spaced from the game machine behind than the upper part where it is difficult to secure a gap from the game machine behind. It is preferable to place the voltage display sticker in the lower part where it is easy to install. It is preferable to arrange it in the upper part or the lower part where it is easy to secure a space from the table.

That is, it is preferable to arrange the voltage display sticker in a region where it is easy to secure a space between the game machines in the back when a plurality of game machines are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 92, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed on the outer wall (outer wall of the housing) of the right side plate 263 of the main body 101 in a region (first Although an example of arranging it in the region FE) has been shown, it may be arranged in the vicinity of the grip portion 298 (handle) of the right side plate 263 (or left side plate 262) shown in FIG.

With such a configuration, the operator can easily notice the voltage display sticker when lifting the game machine by grasping the grip part in transportation or installation work of the game machine, etc., and the operator can reliably confirm the voltage. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

Further, the "outer wall of the housing" according to the present invention is not limited to the rear plate 242, the right side plate 263, and the left side plate 262 of the main body 101, and may be the top plate 261, for example. Further, the "substrate" according to the present invention is not limited to the main substrate substrate 210a constituting the main control section, and may be other substrates such as the sub-control substrate 220a shown in FIG. 79, for example. In addition, the "display means" according to the present invention is not limited to a sticker, and may be, for example, a plate-like member made of metal or wood, or may be produced by printing or painting the housing. may be

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 effect image display device 272, 277 speaker 420 various lamps 300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control Department

In order to solve the above problems, the amusement machine of the present invention includes:
section setting means for setting an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section;
game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
an effect means capable of executing an operation effect related to an operation advantageous to the player;
A game machine comprising
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section based on the fact that a predetermined value that changes as the game progresses reaches a limiter value in the advantageous section,
The game state setting means is means for setting an operation effect game state in which the operation effect is executed in the advantageous section,
The game state setting means is means for terminating the first game state based on the loss of the right to continue the first game state,
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section regardless of the presence or absence of the continuation right and whether or not the limiter value has been reached when the first condition is established in the first gaming state. Ri ,
The section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section when a second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section,
The first case in which the second condition is established in the non-advantageous interval set by the establishment of the first condition in the first gaming state is the first case in which the second condition is established in the first gaming state. It is more advantageous to the player than the second case in which the second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous interval set by other than the satisfaction of one condition,
In the first case, the operation effect game state is more likely to be set than in the second case.
It is characterized by

Claims (6)

section setting means for setting an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section;
game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
A game machine comprising
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section based on the fact that a predetermined value that changes as the game progresses reaches a limiter value in the advantageous section,
The game state setting means is means for terminating the first game state based on the loss of the right to continue the first game state,
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section regardless of the presence or absence of the continuation right and whether or not the limiter value has been reached when the first condition is established in the first gaming state. ,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
The section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section when a second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section,
The first case in which the second condition is established in the non-advantageous interval set by the establishment of the first condition in the first gaming state is the first case in which the second condition is established in the first gaming state. It is more advantageous to the player than in the second case where the second condition is established in the non-advantageous interval set by other than the establishment of one condition,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to claim 2,
Equipped with effect means capable of executing operation effects related to operations advantageous to the player,
The game state setting means is means for setting an operation effect game state in which the operation effect is executed in the advantageous section,
In the first case, the operation effect game state is more likely to be set than in the second case.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
Equipped with effect means capable of executing operation effects related to operations advantageous to the player,
The game state setting means is means for setting an operation effect game state in which the operation effect is executed in the advantageous section,
The operation effect game state includes the first game state,
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section when the first condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section.
A playground characterized by: The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The game state setting means is a means capable of setting a second game state different from the first game state in the advantageous section,
The interval setting means is means for maintaining the advantageous interval when the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state.
A playground characterized by:

Images